JP2019017643A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of stopping a movable accessory in an appropriate position.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a projector capable of projecting video light toward a projection surface original position; a columnar body screen that can be driven such that a projection surface stops in the projection surface original position; a drive mechanism 815 capable of driving the columnar body screen; and a gear-shaped part 744 and a stopper mechanism capable of locking the columnar body screen. Rotation of the columnar body screen is controlled, based on one of a plurality of motor sequence tables. A stopper mechanism includes a stopper pin 7944 that can be engaged with a groove part when it operates to the groove part of the gear-shaped part 744, and is configured such that the groove part and the stopper pin 7944 are in an opposing positional relationship in a state in which the projection surface is stopped in the projection surface original position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 38

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers on the program (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and a symbol combination (display combination) related to the winning of the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. In this way, when a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed, a privilege is given to the player, so as an effect that makes the result of the internal lottery process have an expectation, the action with a dynamic feeling in the movable accessory There has been proposed a gaming machine that can be used (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-042693 A

  However, in a gaming machine in which a movable accessory is operated, such as the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is required to stop at an appropriate position so that the movable accessory does not shift. .

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which a movable accessory can be stopped at an appropriate position.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member (for example, a column screen 710) that can be driven in a predetermined manner;
A drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) capable of driving the movable member;
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member;
Drive mode determining means for driving the movable member to determine any one of the plurality of drive data (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory sequence process);
Drive control means capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determination means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task);
A locking mechanism (gear-shaped portion 744, stopper mechanism 790) capable of locking the movable member whose driving is stopped;
A plurality of lock release data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) for releasing the lock state of the lock mechanism and driving the drive mechanism corresponding to the plurality of drive data are stored. Locking release data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86);
With
The locking mechanism is
A groove forming member (e.g., a gear-shaped portion 744) having a groove provided to be driven together with the movable member;
An engaging member (for example, a stopper pin 7944) that can be engaged with the groove when actuated on the groove,
In the state where the movable member is stopped by the control by the drive control means, the groove portion and the engagement member are arranged to face each other.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the state where the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) is stopped by the control by the drive control means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task), the groove ( For example, the positional relationship is such that the groove 7444) and the engaging member (for example, the stopper pin 7944) face each other. Therefore, in a state where the movable member is stopped by the control by the drive control means, the groove portion and the engaging member can be reliably engaged, and as a result, the movable member can be reliably locked.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The plurality of lock release data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) are:
After the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) is stopped by the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20), the movable member is engaged. It is characterized by being data to be stopped.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) is stopped by the control of the driving mechanism (for example, the driving mechanism 815) based on the driving data (for example, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). After that, since the drive member is locked, the movable member can be locked reliably.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
A projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light toward a predetermined projection area (for example, a projection plane origin position);
The movable member (for example, the column screen 710)
While having a projection surface (for example, projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167), the movable member is stopped by control of the drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) Then, the projection plane is configured to stop at the predetermined projection area (for example, the projection plane origin position).

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) is stopped, the projection plane is stopped at a predetermined projection area (for example, the projection plane origin position). Thus, the movable member can be reliably locked in a state where it is stopped in the predetermined projection area, and positional deviation and the like can be prevented.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a movable accessory can be stopped at an appropriate position.

It is a figure for demonstrating the function flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. 1 is a perspective view of a display device in a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the projection block in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the projection block in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the block to be projected in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the projection member moving mechanism in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a to-be-projected block when a trapezoid member is made into the projection object of image light in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state of a to-be-projected block when a pseudo reel member is made into the projection object of image light in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a to-be-projected block when making a pseudo reel member into the projection object of image light in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the state of a to-be-projected block when a plane screen member is made into the projection object of image light in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a to-be-projected block when a plane screen member is made into the projection object of image light in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole circuit structure with which the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the microprocessor in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is an external appearance perspective view of the display apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of a to-be-projected block. It is a disassembled perspective view of the to-be-projected block shown by FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the to-be-projected block shown by FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the to-be-projected block shown by FIG. It is an external appearance perspective view of a movable screen unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable screen unit into the column body screen, the right base, the left base, and the rotation gear mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a column body screen. It is a disassembled perspective view of a column body screen. It is the perspective view of the column body screen seen from the direction which can visually recognize the aspect by which the male rib is clamped by the female rib. It is the side view which looked at the column body screen from the right side. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st screen member and the 2nd screen member. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional perspective view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 29. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st screen member and the 3rd screen member. It is a disassembled perspective view of a right screen drive base and a drive mechanism. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable screen unit from the right side. It is sectional drawing which looked at the to-be-projected block from upper direction when it cut | disconnects in a horizontal direction so that a rotating shaft may be included. It is the perspective view which looked at the right side of the block to be projected from the front side. It is a figure which shows the state by which the rotation of a movable screen unit is not prevented by the stopper mechanism. It is a figure which shows the state in which rotation of the movable screen unit is prevented by the stopper mechanism. It is an enlarged view of the A section shown in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable screen unit from the right side, Comprising: It is the figure shown so that an optical sensor unit could be visually recognized. It is the figure which arranged the front view and right side view of a to-be-projected block on either side. It is the figure which arranged the front view and right side view of a to-be-projected block on either side. It is the figure which arranged the front view and right view of a to-be-projected block on either side, and is a figure when the projection surface of a 2nd screen member has faced the front. (A) The figure which shows the example of an image projected on the projection surface of the 2nd screen member, (B) The figure which shows the example of an image projected on the projection surface of the 3rd screen member. It is a front view of the front panel of 2nd Embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the front panel from the upper right side. It is a front view of a front effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a front effect unit. It is the BB sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a right light effect unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a right light effect unit. It is a front view of a right light production unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a light guide plate, a light guide plate cover, and an LED board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a LED board, a light-guide plate cover, and a light-guide plate. It is CC sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the LED board and the right side light-guide plate subunit were assembled | attached. FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the right light effect unit as seen from the direction of arrow 990 in FIG. 55. It is a front view of a left side light production unit. It is DD sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a light guide plate, a light guide plate cover, and an LED board. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the right side light effect unit when neither the right light-guide plate subunit nor the right side lens subunit is performing the light emission effect. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the right side light effect unit when the light emission effect is performed about the right side light-guide plate subunit, and the light emission effect is not performed about the right side lens subunit. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the right light production | presentation unit when the light emission effect is not performed about the right light-guide plate subunit, and the light emission effect is performed about the right lens subunit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main board | substrate communication task. It is a figure which shows the content of a command format. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of effect content determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a screen accessory control task. It is a figure which shows a motor sequence table (MT01-MT06). It is a figure which shows a motor sequence table (MT15). It is a figure which shows a motor sequence table (MT20). It is a figure which shows a solenoid sequence table (ST01-ST20). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a screen accessory sequence process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a screen operation cancellation process. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the ON / OFF timing of the control signal which concerns on a motor sequence table (MT01), and the ON / OFF timing of the control signal which concerns on a solenoid sequence table (ST01). It is a figure which shows a cancellation check table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a focus change process.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachislot machine is taken as an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and the configuration and operation thereof will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a pachislot machine having a bonus operation function and an ART function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along an after-mentioned effective line (winning determination line) is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as payout of medals, replay (replay) operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and so-called “out of” other than that. Such a thing is provided.

  When the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (described later, for example) are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R (see, for example, FIG. 2) corresponding to a predetermined reel, the reel stop control means is based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Then, the control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) shown in FIG. That is, the main CPU 101 constitutes a fluctuation control means for controlling fluctuations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the operated stop buttons 17L, 17L, 17R based on the operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R. The stop control means is configured to execute control for stopping the reels 3L, 3C, 3R corresponding to 17C, 17R. As described above, the pachislot is a gaming machine in which a game progresses by a player's operation.

  In the pachi-slot, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding pieces”. In the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols (maximum number of sliding symbols) is determined for four symbols.

  The reel stop control means, when an internal winning combination permitting the symbol combination display related to the winning is determined, normally, the symbol combination is set to the active line within a specified time of 190 msec (four symbols). The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to display as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the active line.

  In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the active line relates to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in the main control circuit described later. Then, when the combination of the displayed symbols is determined to be related to winning by the winning determination means, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game).

  Also, in the pachislot, in the series of gaming operations described above, various effects can be achieved by displaying images on a display device, outputting light from various lamps, outputting sound from a speaker, or a combination thereof. Is done.

  Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for performance is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determination means determines the effect to be executed this time by lottery from the plural types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a sub-control circuit described later.

  Next, when the content of the effect is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reel starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when the presence or absence of a prize is determined. Execute. In this way, in the pachislot, for example, by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination, there is an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) It is provided to the player and the player's interest can be improved.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body 2 (game machine main body). The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached so that the opening of the cabinet 2a can be opened and closed.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means, display columns) are provided in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (main reels) are also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (reel rotation direction). As described above, when the start lever is operated, the plurality of reels are rotated, and the symbols drawn on the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are variably displayed. That is, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R as a plurality of symbol rows with symbols in the circumferential direction constitute a variable display device.

  The front door 2 b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a waist panel 12, and a pedestal portion 13. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachi-slot 1.

  The front panel 10 is provided on the upper portion of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is constituted by a frame-like member having an opening 10a. The opening 10a of the front panel 10 is closed by the display device cover 30, and the display device cover 30 is disposed to face a display device 11 described later disposed inside the cabinet 2a.

  The display device cover 30 is formed of a black translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the video (image) displayed on the display device 11 described later via the display device cover 30. In the present embodiment, the display device cover 30 is formed of a black translucent synthetic resin, thereby suppressing the entry of external light into the cabinet 2a and the image (image) displayed by the display device 11. Is clearly visible.

  A lamp group 21 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, lamps 21 a and 21 b provided on the upper portion of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side. Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is configured by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like (refer to an LED group 85 in FIG. 15 described later), and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect.

  The waist panel 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the door body 9. The waist panel 12 includes a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source (LED included in an LED group 85 described later) that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

  The pedestal portion 13 is provided between the front panel 10 and the waist panel 12. The pedestal 13 includes a symbol display area 4 and various devices (medal slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and the like to be operated by the player. 17R, a settlement button (not shown), and the like.

  The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps with the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position closer to the player than the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. 3L, 3C, 3R has a size that enables visual recognition. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and is configured so that each reel 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

  When the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped, the reel display window 4 is continuously arranged among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel. Two symbols are displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, one symbol (three in total) is placed in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel within the frame of the reel display window 4. ) Is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns). In the present embodiment, a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R within the frame of the reel display window 4, It is defined as an effective line for determining whether or not a prize is won.

  The reel display window 4 is formed by an opening of a frame member 31 provided on the pedestal portion 13. A substantially horizontal plane base region is provided below the frame member 31 that defines the reel display window 4. When viewed from the player side, a medal slot 14 is provided on the right side of the pedestal area, and a MAX bet button 15a and a 1 bet button 15b are provided on the left side.

  The medal slot 14 is provided to accept a medal dropped on the pachislot 1 from the outside by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 14 are used for one game up to a predetermined number (for example, three) set in advance, and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number are deposited inside the pachislot 1. (So-called credit function (game medium storage means)).

  The MAX bet button 15a and the 1 bet button 15b are provided for determining the number of coins used for one game from medals deposited in the cabinet 2a. Note that a bet button LED (not shown) that is lit when a medal can be inserted is provided inside the MAX bet button 15a. The checkout button is provided to draw out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  When the player depresses the MAX bet button 15a, medals corresponding to the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, each time the 1-bet button 15b is pressed, one medal is inserted. When the 1-bet button 15b is operated three times, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the active line is activated. Hereinafter, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, the operation of the 1 bet button 15b, and the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 14 (operation of inserting a medal for playing a game) are all referred to as “insertion operation”.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. That is, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R and provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels constitute a plurality of stop operation means. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are also referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  In addition, an information display 6 is provided in the approximate center of the pedestal region on a substantially horizontal plane below the reel display window 4. The information display 6 is covered with a transparent window cover (not shown).

  The information display 6 has a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as “paid-out number”). (Hereinafter referred to as “7-segment LED”) and information such as the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “credit number”) for digital display (notification) to the player A 2-digit 7-segment LED is provided. In this embodiment, the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of paid-out medals is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information about the occurrence of an error and the error type to the player. Is also used. Therefore, when an error occurs, the display mode of the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of paid-out medals is switched from the display mode of the paid-out number to the display mode of the error type information.

  Further, the information display 6 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on a stop operation necessary for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. ing. The instruction monitor (instruction display) is composed of, for example, a two-digit 7-segment LED. The instruction monitor informs the player of necessary stop operation information by turning on, blinking, or turning off the 2-digit 7-segment LED in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the stop operation information to be notified. To do.

  Note that the aspect uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified here is, for example, in the case of informing the pressing order “1st (perform the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)”. When the numerical value “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order “2nd (perform the first stop operation on the middle reel 3C)” is notified, the numerical value “2” is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order In a case where “3rd (perform the first stop operation on the right reel 3R)” is notified, a numerical value “3” is displayed on the instruction monitor.

  As shown in FIG. 15 to be described later, the information display 6 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 via a door relay terminal board 68 and a game operation display board 81. The display operation of the information display 6 is Control is performed by a later-described main control circuit 90 in the control board 71. Moreover, the control method of the various 7-segment LEDs described above is dynamic lighting control.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, a configuration for notifying the stop operation information using other means controlled by the sub control board 72 is provided. Specifically, a stop operation is performed by a display device 11 described later including a projection block 201 including a projector 213 described later and a projection block 202 including various projection members (see FIG. 3 and FIGS. 5 to 8 described later). The information of is notified.

  When such a configuration is applied, the notification mode in the instruction monitor and the notification mode in other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be different from each other. That is, the instruction monitor may be notified in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to notify the information on the stop operation directly (for example, the numerical value “1” in the instruction monitor). Even if is displayed, there is a possibility that the notification content cannot be specified depending on the player, which is not a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification on the sub side (sub control board side) by other means such as the display device 11 described later, information on the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order “1st” is notified, the instruction monitor displays a numerical value “1” that uniquely corresponds to the push order to be notified, but other means (for example, the display device 11) displays the left reel 3L. The instruction information for performing the first stop operation may be directly notified.

  In the pachislot machine 1 having such a configuration, not only the control of the sub-control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify information on necessary stop operation corresponding to the internal winning combination. In addition, the presence / absence of notification of such stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. For example, in a general gaming state in which no navigation occurs (for example, a non-ART gaming state), information on the stopping operation is not notified, but information on a stopping operation is notified in a notification gaming state in which navigation occurs (for example, an ART gaming state). You may do it.

  Further, a sub display device 18 is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub display device 18 is provided so as to stand substantially vertically from a pedestal region in a substantially horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 13 in the front surface portion of the door body 9. The sub display device 18 includes a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various types of information.

  A touch sensor 19 is provided on the display surface of the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 15 described later). The touch sensor 19 operates in accordance with a predetermined operation principle such as a capacitance method, and when a player's operation is accepted, outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a function that allows the display of the sub display device 18 to be switched in accordance with the player's operation received via the touch sensor 19 (touch input information output from the touch sensor 19). Have The sub display device 18 is controlled by a later-described sub control board 72 (see FIG. 15 described later) based on touch input information output from the touch sensor 19.

  In the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout opening 24, a medal tray 25, two speaker holes 20L, 20R, and the like are provided. The medal payout port 24 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 51 described later to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 24. Sounds such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the effects are output from the two speaker holes 20L and 20R.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet 2a, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the back side of the front door 2b.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the cabinet 2a includes a top plate 27a, a bottom plate 27b, left and right side plates 27c and 27d, and a back plate 27e. And the display apparatus 11 is arrange | positioned in the upper part in the cabinet 2a.

  The display device 11 includes a projection block 201 including a projector 213 described later and a projection block 202 including a plurality of types of projection members described below onto which video light emitted from the projector 213 described below is projected. The projection block 202 is also provided with a function (projection member moving mechanism 305 described later) for switching the projection member according to the gaming state.

  In the display device 11, image light corresponding to image data (PJ-compatible image data described later) generated by image composition processing in a virtual space described later is projected onto a predetermined projection member, and an image display effect or the like is performed. Is called. Specifically, the display device 11 generates image light based on the shape of the projection target (object) to be projected and the positional relationship (projection distance, angle, etc.) between the projector 213 and the projection target described later. Then, the image light is projected onto the surface of the projection target member from a projector 213 described later. By providing such an effect function, an advanced and powerful effect can be performed. The specific configuration and operation of the display device 11 will be described later with reference to the drawings.

  In the lower part of the cabinet 2a, a medal payout device 51 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device), a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are disposed.

  The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 27b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 can store a large amount of medals and can discharge them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, for example, or when the settlement button is pressed and settlement of medals is executed. Then, the medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

  The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is disposed on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is detachably attached to the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (power supply means) (see FIG. 15 described later). The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 27c. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V supplied from the sub power supply device (not shown) into the power of the DC voltage necessary for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

  Further, a sub control board case 57 that houses a sub control board 72 (see FIG. 15 described later) is disposed above the power supply device 53 in the cabinet 2a. The sub control board 72 housed in the sub control board case 57 has a sub control circuit 150 (see FIG. 18 described later) mounted thereon. The sub control circuit 150 is a circuit that controls the execution of effects by displaying images. The sub-control board 72 is a specific example of the control unit according to the present invention. A specific configuration of the sub control circuit 150 will be described later.

  A sub-relay board 61 is disposed above the sub-control board case 57 in the cabinet 2a. The sub relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub control board 72 and a main control board 71 described later is mounted. The sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72, a board disposed around the sub-control board 72, various devices (units), and the like is mounted.

  Although not shown in FIG. 3, a cabinet-side relay board 44 (see FIG. 15 described later) is disposed in the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 15 described later), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (see FIG. 15 described later), and a medal payout count switch (not shown). Is a relay board on which wiring for connecting is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a middle door 41 is disposed at the center of the rear side of the front door 2b, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 2) is attached so as to be openable and closable from the back side. Although not shown in FIG. 4, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41, and main control is performed on the opposite side of the middle door 41 from the reel display window 4 side. A main control board case 55 in which a board 71 (see FIG. 15 described later) is housed is attached. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R through gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  The main control board 71 accommodated in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 90 (see FIG. 16 described later) described later. The main control circuit 90 (main control means) is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot 1 such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, determination of the presence or absence of winning. . In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 also performs control such as a lottery process for determining whether or not a notification game (such as ART) is determined, a process for displaying navigation information on an instruction monitor, and a process for transmitting various test signals. . The specific configuration of the main control circuit 90 will be described later.

  Speakers 65L and 65R are disposed below the middle door 41 on the back side of the front door 2b. The speakers 65L and 65R are disposed at positions facing the speaker holes 20L and 20R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

  A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are disposed above the speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the medal material and shape are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (game medium detecting means: not shown) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is disposed diagonally to the left of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot 1.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is disposed in the area where the front door 2 b is opened and closed by the middle door 41 on the back surface and below the reel display window 4 (see below). 15). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub-relay board 61, a selector 66, a game operation display board 81, a first interface board 401 for a testing machine, This is a relay board on which wiring for connecting each of the second interface boards 402 for the testing machine is mounted. Examples of the various buttons and switches include a MAX bet button 15a, a 1 bet button 15b, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 described later, a start switch 79, and the like.

<Configuration of display device>
Next, the configuration of the display device 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the display device 11.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the display device 11 includes a projection block 201 and a projection block 202 disposed below the projection block 201. The display device 11 generates image light by a projector 213 (described later) installed in the projection block 201, and the projection surface of a projection target member (such as a trapezoidal member 302 described later) provided on the projection block 202. Project to.

  In this specification, expressions such as “video projected (or projected) from the projector 213”, “projected video”, “projected image”, and “projected image” may be used. However, these all mean images projected (or made) onto the projection plane by the image light projected from the projector 213.

[Projection block]
Next, the configuration of the projection block 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the projection block 201. FIG. 7 is a longitudinal sectional view of the projection block 201. Note that a projection block 201 including a projector 213, which will be described later, is a specific example of a projection unit according to the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the projection block 201 includes a base member 211, a reflection member 212, and a projector 213. The base member 211 is formed of a hollow substantially box-like member having an open bottom surface, and includes an upper plate portion 221, a front plate portion 222, a rear plate portion 223, a left side plate portion 224, and a right side plate portion 225. Have.

  A projector 213 is attached to the back surface of the upper plate portion 221 (surface on the projection block 202 side). Further, the front plate portion 222 is provided with a reflection member mounting portion 227, and the reflection member mounting portion 227 is configured by a protruding member that protrudes forward (player side) from the front plate portion 222.

  The front piece 234 of the reflection member mounting portion 227 is formed of a plate-like member, and the surface direction of the front piece 234 (projection surface of the reflection member mounting portion 227) is obliquely upward and the surface direction of the back surface is obliquely downward. It is inclined to become. A reflective member 212 is attached to the back surface of the front piece 234 (the surface on the projector 213 and projection block 202 side).

  As shown in FIG. 7, the reflecting member 212 has a mirror holder 236 that is substantially the same size (size) as the front piece 234 and has a rectangular surface, and is fixed to the mirror holder 236. Reflection mirror 237. The mirror holder 236 is fixed to the back surface of the front piece 234 using a fixing member such as a screw.

  The reflection mirror 237 is fixed to the surface of the mirror holder 236 on the projector 213 and projection block 202 side. The reflecting mirror 237 is tilted so that the surface direction of the reflecting surface is obliquely downward, and the image light emitted from the projector 213 is directed toward a projection target member (a trapezoidal member 302 described later) of the projection target block 202. reflect.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the projector 213 includes a projector main body 241 and a mounting bracket 242. The mounting bracket 242 is configured by a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular surface, and the projector main body 241 is mounted on the back surface (surface on the projection block 202 side) of the mounting bracket 242. The mounting bracket 242 is fixed to the back surface of the upper plate portion 221 of the base member 211 using a fixing member such as a screw.

  The projector main body 241 includes a case 251 (see FIG. 6), an illumination unit 252, a liquid crystal prism unit 253, a projection lens 254, a plurality of heat sinks 255, and a plurality of fans 256. In FIG. 7, only one heat sink 255 and one fan 256 are shown.

  The case 251 is configured with a hollow housing. In the case 251, an illumination unit 252, a liquid crystal prism unit 253, a projection lens 254, a heat sink 255, and a fan 256 are housed. In addition, an opening that is blocked by the projection lens 254 is provided on the front surface of the case 251 (on the reflection member 212 side).

  In the case 251, a liquid crystal prism unit 253 is disposed behind the projection lens 254 (in the direction opposite to the mirror holder 236 side), and an illumination unit 252 is disposed behind the liquid crystal prism unit 253. A plurality of heat sinks 255 are disposed around the lighting unit 252, and the plurality of fans 256 are disposed adjacent to the plurality of heat sinks 255.

  The illumination unit 252 has a plurality of light sources, for example. The plurality of light sources includes a light source R (not shown) that emits red light, a light source G (not shown) that emits green light, and a light source B (not shown) that emits blue light. . Accordingly, light of three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) is incident on the liquid crystal prism unit 253, respectively.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to this, As a light source, you may use one high-intensity discharge lamp, for example. In this case, a color separation mirror (dichroic mirror) is used to separate light emitted from the high-intensity discharge lamp into light of three colors, red (R), green (G), and blue (B).

  The liquid crystal prism unit 253 includes, for example, three liquid crystal panels and a color composition cross prism (dichroic prism). The three liquid crystal panels include a liquid crystal panel R (not shown) on which red light enters, a liquid crystal panel G (not shown) on which green light enters, and a liquid crystal panel B (not shown) on which blue light enters. Consists of. The cross prism combines the three video lights generated by the liquid crystal panels as one video light.

The projection lens 254 is disposed so as to face the reflection mirror 237 of the reflection member 212. Therefore, the image light emitted from the liquid crystal prism unit 253 passes through the projection lens 254 and enters the reflection mirror 237. The plurality of heat sinks 255 radiate heat generated by the lighting unit 252. Further, the plurality of fans 256 includes a plurality of heat sinks 2.
Air is blown to 55 to cool the plurality of heat sinks 255.

[Projected block]
Next, the configuration of the projection block 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the projection block 202. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the movement mechanism of the projection member provided in the projection block 202.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the projection block 202 includes a storage case 301, a trapezoidal member 302, a pseudo reel member 303, a flat screen member 304, and a projection member moving mechanism 305. Each of the trapezoidal member 302, the pseudo reel member 303, and the flat screen member 304 is a specific example of the display unit according to the present invention. The trapezoidal member 302 is a specific example of the first display unit according to the present invention, and each of the pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 is one of the second display unit according to the present invention. A specific example is shown. Further, the projection member moving mechanism 305 is a specific example of the movable control means according to the present invention.

(1) Storage Case The storage case 301 is a hollow housing whose front and upper surfaces are opened, and includes a pedestal part 311, a back wall 312, a left side wall 313, and a right side wall 314. Each wall is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular surface, the pedestal 311 and the back wall 312 form the bottom and the back of the storage case 301, respectively, and the left wall 313 and the right wall 314 respectively A left side surface portion and a right side surface portion of the storage case 301 are formed.

(2) Trapezoidal member The trapezoidal member 302 is composed of a floor plate portion 321 having a trapezoidal surface and three wall plate portions 322, 323, and 324, and a fixing member such as a screw on the pedestal portion 311 of the storage case 301. It is fixed.

  The floor plate portion 321 is placed on the placement surface 311 a of the pedestal portion 311. Under the present circumstances, the floor board part 321 is mounted on the base part 311 so that the lower side (long side) part of the floor board part 321 may be located in the front (player side). In addition, the surface 321a (plane) on the opposite side to the surface which contact | abutted the mounting surface 311a of the base part 311 of the floor board part 321 becomes a projection surface. Video light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflecting member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 321 a of the floor plate portion 321.

  The wall plate portion 322 is configured by a plate-like member having a substantially rectangular surface, and is continuously formed on the upper side portion of the floor plate portion 321. At this time, the wall plate portion 322 is continuously formed on the upper side portion of the floor plate portion 321 so that the angle between the surface of the wall plate portion 322 and the surface of the floor plate portion 321 is substantially vertical. The plane on the front door 2b side (player side) of the wall plate 322 becomes the projection plane 322a. Similar to the projection surface 321 a of the floor plate portion 321, image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflecting member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 322 a of the wall plate portion 322.

  The wall plate part 323 is composed of a plate-like member, and is formed continuously from the left side part of the floor plate part 321 and the left side part of the wall plate part 322. At this time, the wall plate portion 323 is continuous with the left side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the left side portion of the wall plate portion 322 so that the angle between the surface of the wall plate portion 323 and the surface of the floor plate portion 321 is substantially vertical. Formed. And the plane by the side of the wall board part 324 of the wall board part 323 becomes the projection surface 323a. The angle between the projection surface 323a of the wall plate portion 323 and the projection surface 322a of the wall plate portion 322 is an obtuse angle (an angle greater than 90 degrees), so the projection surface 323a opens the opening 10a of the front door 2b. Via the player. Similar to the projection surface 321 a of the floor plate portion 321, the image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflecting member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 323 a of the wall plate portion 323.

  The wall plate portion 324 is composed of a plate-like member, and is formed continuously to the right side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the right side portion of the wall plate portion 322. At this time, the wall plate 324 is continuous with the right side of the floor plate 321 and the right side of the wall plate 322 so that the angle between the surface of the wall plate 324 and the surface of the floor plate 321 is substantially vertical. Formed. And the plane by the side of the wall board part 324 of the wall board part 324 becomes the projection surface 324a. Since the angle between the projection surface 324a of the wall plate 324 and the projection surface 322a of the wall plate 322 is an obtuse angle (an angle greater than 90 degrees), the projection surface 324a opens the opening 10a of the front door 2b. Via the player. Similar to the projection surface 321a of the floor plate portion 321, the image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflecting member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 324a of the wall plate portion 324.

  In the present embodiment, image light is projected onto a partial area of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a of the trapezoidal member 302. The projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a have a projection area where the image light is projected and a non-projection area where the image light is not projected. Note that silver (gray) paint is applied to the projection areas of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a. On the other hand, black paint is applied to the non-projection areas of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a.

  In this manner, by applying black paint to the non-projection areas of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a, light reflection in the non-projection areas is suppressed, and irregular reflection of light in the cabinet 2a is suppressed. can do. Further, by applying a black paint to the non-projection area, it is possible to vibrate, rotate, collapse, change the shape, change the coloring, and partially emphasize the expression of the projection target member.

(3) Pseudo reel member As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the pseudo reel member 303 includes an arc plate portion 331 and a pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B (for the rotating arm 332B, see FIG. 11 described later). Is provided.

  The arc plate portion 331 is configured by a plate body that extends in an arc shape (a plate body whose side surface extends in an arc shape). Therefore, the circular arc plate portion 331 is formed with the inner peripheral surface 331a and the outer peripheral surface 331b. On the inner peripheral surface 331a of the arc plate portion 331, a decoration related to the model of the pachislot 1 is provided. On the other hand, the outer peripheral surface 331b is formed of a smooth curved surface and serves as a projection surface onto which video light emitted from the projector 213 is projected (see FIG. 11 described later). Further, silver (or gray) paint is applied to the inner peripheral surface 331a and the outer peripheral surface 331b of the arc plate portion 331.

  The pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B are respectively formed continuously on the pair of arcuate side portions of the arcuate plate portion 331, and the surface is formed of a substantially fan-shaped plate. The pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B are rotatably supported by support plates 351A and 351B (to be described later) of the projection member moving mechanism 305, respectively. The pseudo reel member 303 rotates between a standby position where the inner peripheral surface 331a faces forward (player side) and an exposed position where the outer peripheral surface 331b faces forward. The operation of the pseudo reel member 303 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12 described later.

(4) Plane Screen Member As shown in FIG. 8, the plane screen member 304 is composed of a plate-like member having a substantially rectangular surface, and includes a first plane 304a (lower surface in FIG. 8) and a second plane 304b (FIG. 8 is an upper surface). A silver (or gray) paint is applied to the first flat surface 304 a of the flat screen member 304. On the other hand, white paint is applied to the second plane 304b, and the second plane 304b serves as a projection surface for image light projected from the projector 213 via the reflecting member 212.

  The flat screen member 304 rotates between a standby position where the surface direction of the first flat surface 304a is obliquely downward and an exposed position where the surface direction of the second flat surface (projection surface) 304b is the front (player side). To do. When the flat screen member 304 is disposed at the exposed position, the image light is projected onto the second flat surface (projection surface) 304b.

  The flat screen member 304 is supported by a pair of crank arms 378A and 378B (described later) of the projection member moving mechanism 305, and the flat screen member 304 is rotated by the rotation of the pair of crank arms 378A and 378B. The crank arms 378A and 378B are rotatably supported by the support plates 351A and 351B, respectively.

(5) Projected Member Moving Mechanism The projected member moving mechanism 305 includes support plates 351A and 351B, a pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352, and a flat screen member moving mechanism 353, as shown in FIGS. .

Both of the support plates 351A and 351B are configured as substantially rectangular plate-like members whose surfaces are vertically long,
The support plates 351A and 351B are arranged to face each other with an appropriate distance (interval larger than the width of the trapezoidal member 302) in the left-right direction (long-side direction of the pseudo reel member 303). The support plates 351A and 351B are fixed to the mounting surface 311a of the pedestal 311 of the storage case 301 using a fixing member such as a screw. A pseudo reel member 303 is disposed between the support plate 351A and the support plate 351B.

  Further, the support plates 351A and 351B respectively support the rotation arms 332A and 332B of the pseudo reel member 303 so as to be rotatable. The support plates 351A and 351B have a through-hole through which a shaft 374 described later of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 passes and a through-hole through which the rotary shaft 335 of the rotary arms 332A and 332B in the pseudo reel member 303 passes. Is provided.

  Further, the support plate 351B is provided with a stopper 355, a first sensor 356, and a second sensor 357. The stopper 355 is a member for limiting a rotation range of a drive gear 362 described later of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352. The first sensor 356 detects a later-described crank arm 378B of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 when the flat screen member 304 is moved to the standby position. The second sensor 357 detects a later-described crank arm 378B of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 when the flat screen member 304 is moved to the exposed position.

  The pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 includes a drive motor 361 and a drive gear 362. The drive motor 361 is fixed to the motor fixing portion 314b of the right side wall 314 in the storage case 301 using a fixing member such as a screw. At this time, the drive motor 361 is attached to the right side wall 314 so that the rotation shaft (not shown) of the drive motor 361 meshes with the drive gear 362.

  The drive gear 362 is constituted by a gear member having a substantially semicircular surface, and is rotatably supported by the support plate 351B. The drive gear 362 is disposed on the surface of the support plate 351B that faces the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. In addition, a rotation shaft 335 of a rotation arm 332B (see FIG. 11 described later) of the pseudo reel member 303 is connected to the center of the drive gear 362.

  The flat screen member moving mechanism 353 includes a drive motor 371, intermediate gears 372 and 373, a shaft 374, crank gears 375 and 376, and crank arms 378A and 378B. The drive motor 371 is fixed to the support plate 351B using a fixing member such as a screw. At this time, the drive motor 371 is attached to the support plate 351B so that the rotation shaft 371a of the drive motor 371 meshes with the intermediate gear 372.

  The intermediate gear 372 is disposed between the support plate 351 </ b> B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. One end of a shaft 374 that protrudes through a through hole 314 a (see FIG. 8) provided in the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301 is connected to the center of the intermediate gear 372.

  The intermediate gear 373 is disposed between the support plate 351 </ b> A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301. The other end of the shaft 374 protruding through a through hole 313 a (see FIG. 8) provided in the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301 is connected to the center of the intermediate gear 373.

  The shaft 374 is provided through the support plates 351A and 351B and rotatably supports the support plates 351A and 351B. Since the intermediate gear 373 is connected to the intermediate gear 372 via the shaft 374 as described above, the intermediate gear 373 rotates together with the intermediate gear 372.

  The crank gear 375 is disposed between the support plate 351 </ b> B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the right side wall 314. At this time, the crank gear 375 is disposed so as to mesh with the intermediate gear 372. A crank pin 375a is formed on the surface of the intermediate gear 372 facing the support plate 351B.

  The crank gear 376 is disposed between the support plate 351 </ b> A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the left side wall 313. At this time, the crank gear 376 is disposed so as to mesh with the intermediate gear 373. A crank pin 376a is formed on the surface of the intermediate gear 373 facing the support plate 351A.

  The crank arm 378A is disposed between the support plate 351A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the support plate 351A. The crank arm 378 </ b> A includes an arm portion 381 formed of a plate-like member extending in a substantially L shape, and a connection portion 382 provided at one end of the arm portion 381.

  The arm portion 381 is provided with a rotation shaft 384 that is rotatably engaged with the support plate 351A, and an engagement groove 385 that extends linearly. The engagement groove 385 is provided on the surface of the arm portion 381 that faces the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301. A crank pin 376a of the crank gear 376 is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 385.

  The connection part 382 is configured by a plate-like member having a rectangular surface. One surface of the connecting portion 382 is continuous with the arm portion 381, and the other surface (plane) is in contact with the first plane 304a of the flat screen member 304 (see FIG. 8). The connecting portion 382 is fixed to the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 using a fixing member such as a screw.

  The crank arm 378B is disposed between the support plate 351B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the support plate 351B. The crank arm 378 </ b> B has an arm portion 391 configured by a plate-like member extending in a substantially L shape, and a connection portion 392 provided at one end of the arm portion 391.

  The arm portion 391 includes a rotation shaft (not shown) that is rotatably engaged with the support plate 351A, a linearly extending engagement groove 395, a first detection piece 396, and a second detection piece 397. Is provided. The engagement groove 395 is provided on the surface of the arm portion 391 that faces the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. A crank pin 375a of the crank gear 375 is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 395.

  The first detection piece 396 is provided at a position between the connection portion 392 and the engagement groove 395, and protrudes outward from a side portion of one of the arm portions 391 (on the back surface side in FIG. 9). When the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 moves the flat screen member 304 to the standby position, the first detection piece 396 is detected by the first sensor 356 provided on the support plate 351B.

  The second detection piece 397 is provided below the first detection piece 396 and protrudes outward from one side of the arm portion 391. When the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 moves the flat screen member 304 to the exposed position, the second detection piece 397 is detected by the second sensor 357 provided on the support plate 351B.

  The connection part 392 is configured by a plate-like member having a rectangular surface. One surface of the connecting portion 392 is continuous with the arm portion 391, and the other surface (plane) is in contact with the first plane 304a of the flat screen member 304 (see FIG. 8). The connecting portion 392 is fixed to the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 using a fixing member such as a screw.

[Status when using trapezoidal members]
Next, a state when the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of image light will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a longitudinal sectional view of the projection target block 202 when the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of image light. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the projection target block 202 when the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of image light.

  In the state where the trapezoidal member 302 is the projection target of the image light, as shown in FIG. 10, the pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 are arranged at the respective standby positions.

  When the pseudo reel member 303 is disposed at the standby position, the pseudo reel member 303 is located behind the trapezoidal member 302, and the inner peripheral surface 331a of the circular arc plate portion 331 is directed forward. At this time, one radial portion (one radial side portion) of the drive gear 362 contacts the stopper 355 (see FIG. 9). Therefore, when the projection block 202 is viewed from the right side (right side wall 314 side), the rotation of the drive gear 362 clockwise (clockwise) is locked by the stopper 355.

  Further, when the flat screen member 304 is disposed at the standby position, the flat screen member 304 is positioned above the trapezoidal member 302 and the first flat surface 304a faces downward. At this time, the first sensor 356 detects the first detection piece 396 provided on the crank arm 378B of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 150 detects that the flat screen member 304 is disposed at the standby position.

  The pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 (projection member) arranged at the standby position are not interposed between the trapezoidal member 302 and the opening 10a (see FIG. 2) of the front panel 10. Therefore, in this state, when viewed from the player side, the trapezoidal member 302 is exposed to the opening 10a of the front panel 10 and becomes a projection target of the image light.

  Video light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a (see FIG. 8 for the projection surface 324a) of the trapezoidal member 302 that is the projection target. Is done. Thereby, the image | video used for an effect is displayed on each projection surface of the trapezoid member 302 which is a projection object, and it becomes visible to a player.

  In this embodiment, image light is projected onto the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a of the floor plate portion 321 and the three wall plate portions 322, 323, and 324 (see FIG. 8 for the wall plate portion 324) of the trapezoidal member 302. The video used for production is displayed. As a result, it is possible to perform a novel effect in which a stereoscopic effect and a depth can be felt in the video with a simple configuration without increasing the cost. As a result, the player's interest in video display effects can be enhanced.

  In this embodiment, the trapezoidal member 302 applied as the projection member has four projection planes that intersect at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the projected image light. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the projection member according to the present invention, for example, a projection member having two or three projection surfaces intersecting at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the image light is used. Alternatively, a projection target member having five or more projection surfaces that intersect at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the image light may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration example in which the trapezoidal member 302 is fixed at a predetermined position is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the trapezoidal member according to the present invention, for example, a trapezoidal member that is movable between a standby position where the image light emitted from the projector is not projected and an exposure position where the image light emitted from the projector is projected may be used. Good. Further, in this case, as the movement mode of the trapezoidal member, for example, a mode in which the trapezoidal member rotates around an appropriate axis or a mode in which the trapezoidal member moves linearly may be used.

[Operation of pseudo reel member]
Next, the operation of the pseudo reel member 303 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a state of the projection target block 202 when the pseudo reel member 303 is a projection target of image light. FIG. 12 is a longitudinal sectional view of the projection target block 202 when the pseudo reel member 303 is a projection target of image light.

  When the pseudo reel member 303 is a projection target of the image light, the pseudo reel member 303 is moved from the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 10) to the exposed position (the state shown in FIGS. 11 and 12). At this time, the flat screen member 304 is maintained in the state of being placed at the standby position.

  In order to move the pseudo reel member 303 to the exposure position, the drive motor 361 of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 is driven, and the drive gear 362 is viewed from the right side (right side wall 314 side) of the projection target block 202 in the drawing. Is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) (see thick arrow in FIG. 11).

  Since the rotation shaft 335 provided on the rotation arm 332B of the pseudo reel member 303 is connected to the drive gear 362, when the drive gear 362 is rotated counterclockwise, the pseudo reel member 303 is moved from the standby position to the left. Rotate around. When the other radius portion of the drive gear 362 comes into contact with the stopper 355, the counterclockwise rotation of the drive gear 362 is locked by the stopper 355. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the pseudo reel member 303 is arranged at the exposed position.

  When the pseudo reel member 303 is disposed at the exposed position, the pseudo reel member 303 covers the front of the trapezoidal member 302. At this time, the flat screen member 304 arranged at the standby position is not interposed between the pseudo reel member 303 and the opening 10a (see FIG. 2) of the front panel 10. Therefore, in this state, when viewed from the player side, the pseudo reel member 303 is exposed to the opening 10a of the front panel 10 and becomes a projection target of the image light.

  Image light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the outer peripheral surface 331b (hereinafter referred to as “projection surface 331b”) of the pseudo reel member 303 that is the projection target. As a result, an image used for production is displayed on the pseudo reel member 303 that is the projection target, and can be visually recognized by the player.

  In order to move the pseudo reel member 303 from the exposure position to the standby position, the drive motor 361 of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 is driven, and the drive gear 362 is viewed from the right side of the block to be projected 202 in the drawing. Rotate clockwise (clockwise).

  When the drive gear 362 rotates clockwise, the pseudo reel member 303 rotates clockwise from the exposure position. When one radial portion of the drive gear 362 contacts the stopper 355 (state shown in FIG. 9), the clockwise rotation of the drive gear 362 is locked by the stopper 355. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, the pseudo reel member 303 is disposed at the standby position.

  In the present embodiment, image light representing a reel is projected onto a curved projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303. Thereby, it can be shown that the reel is physically present in the cabinet 2a facing the opening 10a of the front panel 10 (front door 2b). As a result, it is possible to provide a novel effect in which a stereoscopic effect and depth can be felt with a simple configuration without increasing the cost, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect of displaying the image.

[Operation of flat screen member]
Next, the operation of the flat screen member 304 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a state of the projection target block 202 when the flat screen member 304 is a projection target of image light. FIG. 14 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the projection target block 202 when the flat screen member 304 is a projection target of image light.

  In the case where the flat screen member 304 is a projection target of image light, the flat screen member 304 is moved from the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 10) to the exposed position (the state shown in FIGS. 13 and 14). At this time, the pseudo reel member 303 is maintained in the state of being placed at the standby position.

  In order to move the flat screen member 304 to the exposed position, the drive motor 371 of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 is driven, and the intermediate gear 372 is viewed from the right side (right wall 314 side) of the projection target block 202 in the drawing. Is rotated clockwise (clockwise) (see thick arrow in FIG. 13).

  One end of a shaft 374 is connected to the intermediate gear 372, and an intermediate gear 373 (see FIG. 9) is connected to the other end of the shaft 374. Therefore, when the intermediate gear 372 rotates clockwise when the projection target block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing, the intermediate gear 373 also rotates clockwise.

  When the intermediate gears 372 and 373 rotate clockwise, the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing. The crank pin 375a of the crank gear 375 is engaged with the engagement groove 395 of the crank arm 378B, and the crank pin 376a of the crank gear 376 is engaged with the engagement groove 385 of the crank arm 378A.

  Therefore, when the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate counterclockwise, the crank pins 375a and 376 press the crank arms 378A and 378B so as to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise), respectively. As a result, the flat screen member 304 connected to the crank arms 378A and 378B rotates counterclockwise from the standby position when the projection target block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing.

  When the second sensor 357 detects the second detection piece 397 of the crank arm 378B, the drive motor 371 stops driving and the rotation of the flat screen member 304 stops. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the flat screen member 304 is disposed at the exposed position.

  When the flat screen member 304 is disposed in the exposed position, the flat screen member 304 covers the front of the trapezoidal member 302. At this time, the pseudo reel member 303 disposed in the standby position is not interposed between the flat screen member 304 and the opening 10a (see FIG. 2) of the front panel 10. Therefore, in this state, when viewed from the player side, the flat screen member 304 is exposed to the opening 10a of the front panel 10 and is a projection target.

  The image light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304 that is the projection target. As a result, the video used for production is displayed on the flat screen member 304 that is the projection target, and is visible to the player. For example, by projecting image light representing a two-dimensional image onto the projection surface 304b that is a plane of the flat screen member 304, the same image as when the image is displayed on a display device using a flat panel such as a liquid crystal display device. You can show the video to the player.

  In order to move the flat screen member 304 from the exposed position to the standby position, the driving motor 371 of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 is driven, and the intermediate gear 372 is seen from the right side of the projection target block 202 in the drawing. 373 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

  When the intermediate gears 372 and 373 rotate counterclockwise, the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate clockwise when the projection target block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing. When the crank gears 375 and 376 rotate clockwise, the crank pins 375a and 376 press the crank arms 378A and 378B so as to rotate clockwise. As a result, the planar screen member 304 connected to the crank arms 378A and 378B rotates clockwise from the exposure position when the projection target block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing.

  Thereafter, when the first sensor 356 detects the first detection piece 396 of the crank arm 378B, the drive motor 371 stops driving, and the rotation of the flat screen member 304 stops. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, the flat screen member 304 is disposed at the standby position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, white paint is applied to the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304. Then, image light representing a two-dimensional image is projected onto the projection surface 304 b of the flat screen member 304. White and silver (gray) have at least a constant reflectance of visible light, and white has a higher light reflectance than silver. Therefore, the two-dimensional image projected onto the white projection surface 304b can be made easier to see than the two-dimensional image projected onto the projection surface 304b coated with silver paint, for example.

  On the other hand, silver (gray) paint is applied to the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a of the trapezoid member 302 and the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303. Therefore, the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a of the trapezoidal member 302 and the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303 have a more three-dimensional image than when white paint is applied to these projection surfaces. It can be made to look three-dimensional.

<Control system for pachislot>
Next, a control system provided in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot 1.

  The pachi-slot 1 includes a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. The pachi-slot 1 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key switch 54 (setting switch), and a cabinet-side relay board 44 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot 1 includes an external concentration terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, a reset switch 76, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44. In addition, since the structure of the hopper apparatus 51 was mentioned above, the description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  The reel relay terminal plate 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 74 is electrically connected to the stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motors, whereby each reel The rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R is controlled.

  The setting key type switch 54 is provided on the main control board case 55. The setting key type switch 54 is used when changing the setting (setting 1 to setting 6) of the pachislot 1 or when checking the setting of the pachislot 1.

  The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the main control board 71, the external concentration terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the medal auxiliary storage switch 75, the reset switch 76, and the power supply device 53 is mounted. It is. The external concentration terminal board 47 is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52 and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals. The reset switch 76 is used, for example, when changing the setting of the pachislot 1.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b and a power switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot 1. The power supply board 53 b is connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44 and also connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61.

  The pachislot machine 1 includes a door relay terminal plate 68, a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a checkout switch 78, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, a sub-relay board 61, a first testing machine interface board 401, and a second testing machine interface board 402. Since the selector 66, the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The BET switch 77 (insertion operation detecting means) detects that the MAX bet button 15a or the 1 bet button 15b has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that a settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation).

  The stop switch substrate 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable main reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch substrate 80 is provided with a stop switch (not shown). The stop switch detects that each stop button 17L, 17C, 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display 6 (7-segment display) and the LED 82. The LED 82 includes, for example, three LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals (hereinafter referred to as “first LED” to “first LED”) that are turned on in correspondence with the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter referred to as “inserted number”). LED for lighting a medal insertion mark, a game start mark, a replay mark, etc. based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81) Etc. are included. In the first to third LEDs (display means), when one medal is inserted, the first LED is turned on, and when two medals are inserted, the first and second LEDs are turned on, and three medals (game) When the startable number of sheets is inserted, the first to third LEDs are turned on. Since the information display device 6 has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  Both the first interface board 401 for testing machine and the second interface board 402 for testing machine are relay boards used when various signals relating to games are output to the testing machine in the pachislot 1 certification test (trial fire test) ( Since these relay boards are not mounted on the pachislot machine 1 as a release product for sale, the main control circuit 90 of the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 401 for testing machine and the testing machine. Various electronic components necessary for connection to the second interface board 402 are not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling a main operation related to a game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via the first interface board 401 for a testing machine, and is determined by the main control board 71, for example. The test signal related to the pushed navigation in order is output via the second interface board 402 for the testing machine.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. Further, the pachislot 1 is connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61, the speaker group 84, the LED group 85, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63, the touch sensor 19, and the projection member moving mechanism 305 (display unit). ). Since the touch sensor 19 and the projection member moving mechanism 305 have been described above, descriptions thereof are omitted here.

  The speaker group 84 includes speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED group 85 includes a lamp group 21 provided on the front panel 10 and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel of the waist panel 12 from the back side. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 stores opening / closing history information of the middle door 41. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 150) when the middle door 41 is opened.

  The pachi-slot 1 includes a ROM cartridge substrate 86 and a display device relay substrate 87 connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the display device relay substrate 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing various control programs executed by the sub CPU 151, production images (videos), sound (speaker groups 84), light (LED groups 85), and communication data. . The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a specific example of a nonvolatile storage unit (storage unit) according to the present invention.

  The display device relay board 87 is a board that relays connection wiring between the sub control board 72, the projector 213 included in the display device 11, and the sub display device 18. Since the projector 213 and the sub display device 18 have been described above, description thereof is omitted here.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 90 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 90 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The main control circuit 90 includes a microprocessor 91, a clock pulse generation circuit 92, a power management circuit 93, and a switching regulator 94 (power supply means).

  The microprocessor 91 is a microprocessor with a security function for gaming machines. Note that the microprocessor 91 of the present embodiment is provided with various instruction codes (instruction codes dedicated to the main CPU 101) unique to the microprocessor 91 that can be defined on the source program. In this embodiment, by using the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101, the processing efficiency and the program capacity are reduced. The internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  The clock pulse generation circuit 92 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the microprocessor 91. The microprocessor 91 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

  The power management circuit 93 manages fluctuations in the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 53b (see FIG. 15). The power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal to the “XSRST” terminal of the microprocessor 91, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the startup voltage value (10V) from 0V). When a power interruption occurs (when the power supply voltage falls below the power failure voltage value (10.5 V) from 12 V), a power interruption detection signal is output to the “XINT” terminal of the microprocessor 91. That is, the power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal (start signal) to the microprocessor 91 when the power is turned on, and a power failure detection signal (power failure signal) to the microprocessor 91 when a power failure occurs. Also serves as a means to output (power failure means).

  The switching regulator 94 is a DC / DC conversion circuit, generates a DC drive voltage (DC power supply voltage of 5 V DC) for the microprocessor 91, and outputs the generated DC drive voltage to the “VCC” terminal of the microprocessor 91.

<Microprocessor>
Next, the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91.

  The microprocessor 91 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (first storage means), a main RAM 103 (second storage means), an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, an arithmetic circuit 107, A random number circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, a first serial communication circuit 114, and a second serial communication circuit 115 are included. These units constituting the microprocessor 91 are connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

  The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the clock pulse generated by the clock circuit 105 and performs control related to the overall game operation. Here, reel stop control will be described as an example of the control operation of the main CPU 101.

  The main CPU 101 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 101 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. The reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position of each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each main reel. It is detected by a provided reel position detector (not shown).

  Here, management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 103. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 103 is incremented by one. A symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 150, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The external bus interface 104 is for electrically connecting an external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, each reel) provided outside the microprocessor 91 are connected to the microprocessor 91. It is an interface circuit. The clock circuit 105 includes, for example, a frequency divider (not shown) and the like, and the clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from the clock pulse generation circuit 92 is received by other components (for example, the timer circuit 113). Convert to a clock pulse signal of the frequency used. Note that the clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

  The reset controller 106 resets an IAT (Illegal Address Trap) or WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. For example, when executing a multiplication instruction (“MUL” instruction) on the source program, the arithmetic circuit 107 executes a multiplication process based on this instruction.

  The random number circuit 110 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Although not shown, the random number circuit 110 generates a random number register 0 for obtaining a 2-byte hard latch random number, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining a 2-byte soft latch random number, and a 1-byte soft latch random number. It is composed of random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from a predetermined range of random numbers generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random value for internal lottery. The parallel port 111 is a port (memory map I / O) for signals input / output between the microprocessor 91 and various circuits (for example, the power management circuit 93) provided outside the microprocessor 91. . The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112. The start switch 79 is connected to one of the input ports PI0 to PI4 of the parallel port 111, and the latch signal is sent from the parallel port 111 to the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 at a timing (on edge) when the start switch 79 is turned on. Is output. In the random number circuit 110, when the latch signal is input, the random number register 0 is latched, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired.

  The interrupt controller 112 performs an interrupt process by the main CPU 101 based on a power interruption detection signal input from the power management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a time-out signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a cycle of 1.1172 ms. Control the execution timing of. When a power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93 or a time-out signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 sends an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 101. Output to. Based on the interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to the time-out signal from the timer circuit 113, the main CPU 101 performs input port check processing, reel control processing, communication data transmission processing, 7-segment LED drive processing, timer Various interrupt processing such as update processing is performed.

  The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a frequency divider (not shown)). Count elapsed time). Then, the timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

  The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data (various control commands (commands)) is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72. The second serial communication circuit 115 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 402 for the testing machine. That is, the first serial communication circuit 114 constitutes an information transmission unit capable of transmitting command data to the sub control circuit 150.

<Sub control circuit>
[Sub-control circuit configuration]
Next, the configuration of the sub control circuit 150 (sub control means) mounted on the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 150 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The sub-control circuit 150 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 90 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub control circuit 150 basically includes a sub CPU 151, a sub RAM 152, a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 153, a VRAM (Video RAM) 154, and a driver 155. The VRAM 154 (drawing RAM) includes a frame buffer and a screen buffer, which will be described later. The sub CPU 151 is a specific example of the control processing unit according to the present invention, the GPU 153 is a specific example of the image processing unit according to the present invention, and the VRAM 154 is a volatile storage unit. One specific example is shown.

  The sub CPU 151 is connected to the ROM cartridge substrate 86. The driver 155 is connected to the display device relay board 87. That is, the driver 155 is connected to the projector 213 and the sub display device 18 via the display device relay board 87.

  The sub CPU 151 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 151 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 90 and a random number value for production are extracted, and production registration for determining and registering production contents (production data). Various programs for executing tasks are included. In addition, the control program includes a drawing control task for controlling the display of video by the display device 11 based on the determined content of the presentation, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light from a light source such as the LED group 85, and a sound by the speaker group 84. Various programs for executing a voice control task or the like for controlling the output of the program are also included.

  The data storage area stores a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and animation data (including image data and virtual object data described later) relating to the creation of video. Storage area to be included. Further, the data storage area includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub-RAM 152 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as a sub flag (internal winning combination) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

  The sub CPU 151, the GPU 153 (rendering processor), the VRAM 154, and the driver 155 create a video based on the animation data specified by the contents of the presentation, and the generated video is displayed on the display device 11 (projector 213) and / or the sub display device 18. Display. The display device 11 (projector 213) and the sub display device 18 are individually controlled by the sub control board 72.

  Further, the sub CPU 151 causes the speaker group 84 to output a sound such as BGM based on the sound data designated by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 151 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 based on the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which a method (front projection) in which an image is displayed by projecting light of a projector from the surface side of the projection surface (screen) of the projection target member has been described. The invention is not limited to this. For example, a method of projecting light from a projector from the back surface (rear surface) side of the screen to display an image (rear projection) may be employed, and even in this case, an optimum effect can be obtained. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, a liquid crystal display device or a display device such as an organic / inorganic EL can be used instead of the projector.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the display device will be described. The pachislot of the second embodiment includes a display device 120 (see FIG. 19) instead of the display device 11 (see, for example, FIG. 5) included in the pachislot 1 of the first embodiment. The display device 120 included in the pachislot machine according to the second embodiment differs from the display device 11 described above included in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the projection target block and the front panel 10 are located behind the front panel 10. This is a point provided with a production unit 900 (see FIG. 45). That is, the pachislot of the second embodiment includes a projection block 203 (see FIG. 19) instead of the projection block 202. Further, a front panel 500 (see FIG. 45) is provided instead of the front panel 10. The remaining configuration except for the display device 120 (more specifically, the projection target block 203) is the same as that of the first embodiment except that the front effect unit 900 is provided.

  FIG. 19 is an external perspective view of the display device 120 according to the second embodiment, and the display device 120 includes a projection block 201 and a projection block 203 arranged below the projection block 201. On the projection target block 203, an image projected by the image light projected from the projector 213 is reflected and projected by a reflecting member 212 (for example, see FIG. 6). 20 is a perspective view of the projection block 203, and FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the projection block 203 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 20 shows the case where the image light projected from the projector 213 is projected onto the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, which will be described later. Therefore, the image light projected from the projector 213 is for reference. FIG. 22 shows a case where the image light is projected onto the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 described later, and the image light projected from the projector 213 is projected onto the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 described later. The case where this is done is shown in FIG.

  Note that the projector 213 capable of projecting image light toward the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 constitutes display means or projection means.

<Projected block>
As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the projection block 203 includes a movable screen unit 700, a pair of screen drive bases (a left screen drive base 702 and a right screen drive base 704), and a lower part of the movable screen unit 700. A fixed base 708 provided, an upper base 706 provided on an upper back surface of the movable screen unit 700, a drive mechanism 815 capable of rotating a column body screen 710 included in the movable screen unit 700, and the movable screen unit 700. A rotating shaft 722 (see, for example, FIG. 21) that is the center of the rotating screen unit, a stopper mechanism 790 that prevents rotation of the movable screen unit 700 (for example, see FIG. Detect position at Optical sensor unit 800 which serves as a position detecting means for (e.g., see FIG. 40 to be described later) provided with a. In the following description, the case where the movable screen unit 700 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the right side of the pachislot is referred to as “forward rotation”, and the case where it is rotated counterclockwise is referred to as “reverse rotation”. In addition, when the movable screen unit 700 is rotated forward, the motor 812 is rotated in the forward direction (forward rotation). Further, when the movable screen unit 700 is rotated in the reverse direction, the motor 812 is rotated in the reverse direction (reverse rotation).

(1) Movable Screen Unit FIG. 24 is an external perspective view of the movable screen unit 700. As shown in FIG. 24, the movable screen unit 700 includes a triangular columnar screen 710 having a hollow interior (see, for example, FIG. 25 described later), and a right base 732 that blocks the right side surface of the columnar screen 710 when viewed from the front. And a left base 736 (see FIG. 25 to be described later) that closes the left side surface of the columnar screen 710 when viewed from the front, and a rotation gear mechanism 740.

  In this specification, “front” means the front of the pachislot. Therefore, “front view” means that the pachislot is viewed from the front.

  FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view in which the movable screen unit 700 is disassembled into a columnar screen 710, a right base 732, a left base 736, and a rotating gear mechanism 740.

(1-1) Column body screen With reference to FIG.26 and FIG.27, the structure of the column body screen 710 is demonstrated. 26 and 27 are exploded perspective views of the columnar screen 710, and the angle at which the columnar screen 710 is viewed is different between FIG. 26 and FIG.

  The column screen 710 includes a first screen member 712, a second screen member 714, and a third screen member 716. The first screen member 712, the second screen member 714, and the third screen member 716 are all formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  The first screen member 712 includes a rectangular flat panel 7121 and a flat panel base 7125.

  The flat panel 7121 has a projection surface 7123 (a lower surface shown in FIGS. 26 and 27) on which an image projected from the projector 213 is displayed, and the projection surface 7123 and the rear surface 7124 of the projection surface 7123. Are both flat.

  The flat panel base 7125 is a base serving as a base of the flat panel 7121 and has a function of increasing the rigidity of the first screen member 712. The flat panel 7121 is fixed to the surface side of the flat panel base 7125 (the lower surface side shown in FIGS. 26 and 27) by a predetermined method such as an engaging means or an adhesive means. Further, the flat panel base 7125 is formed with a rib group 7126 made up of a large number of ribs on the back surface side (the upper surface side shown in FIGS. 26 and 27).

  The second screen member 714 has a rectangular shape in a front view and a projection surface 7141 on which an image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. The projection surface 7141 is a view of the course from the bow. It is a concave curved surface that makes you feel like.

  The third screen member 716 includes a three-dimensional object 7166 and a three-dimensional object base 7161 whose outer shape in front view is rectangular. Both the surface of the three-dimensional object 7166 and the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161 function as a projection surface 7167 on which an image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the three-dimensional object 7166 has a convex shape that makes an image of a spread book appear. The projection surface 7167 of the three-dimensional object 7166 can display an image as if characters are written in a book or an image that turns a page by projection from the projector 213. The three-dimensional object base 7161 has two openings 7163, and the openings are blocked by the three-dimensional object 7166 so that the two openings 7163 cannot be seen in front view. The three-dimensional object 7166 and the three-dimensional object base 7161 both have a surface functioning as a projection surface, but the three-dimensional object has a convex shape, and therefore the periphery thereof (for example, the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161). Has a shaded area.

  As described above, the surface of the three-dimensional object 7166 and the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161 are not limited to functioning as the projection surface 7167 on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. Of the three-dimensional object 7166 and the three-dimensional object base 7161, only the surface of the three-dimensional object 7166 may function as the projection surface 7167, and the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161 may not function as the projection surface 7167.

  As described above, when the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 have different three-dimensional (undulation) shapes and image light corresponding to the three-dimensional shapes of the respective projection surfaces is projected from the projector 213, the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and so on. With the three-dimensional feature of the 7167 and the image light, it is possible to realize an effect rich in the presence of the player.

  FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the columnar screen 710 as seen from the direction in which the aspect in which the male rib 7145 is sandwiched between the female ribs 7164 described later can be seen. FIG. 29 is a side view of the column screen 710 viewed from the right side.

  As shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, the column screen 710 has an end on the long side of the first screen member 712 and an end on the long side of the second screen member 714 joined together. The end on the long side of the second screen member 714 and the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 are joined together, and the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 and the first side The end portions on the long side of the screen member 712 are joined to each other. In this manner, the three screen members 712, 714, 716 form a hollow triangular prism shape.

  In the second screen member 714, a groove 7142 is formed along the long side on the back surface on the side to be joined to the first screen member 712. Then, the end of the long side of the first screen member 712 and the end of the long side of the first screen member 712 and the long side of the second screen member 714 are applied to this groove 7142. The ends are joined. Thereby, a gap between the two ends that may occur at the joint between the long side end of the first screen member 712 and the long side end of the second screen member 714 can be filled. Accordingly, the movable screen unit 700 is located at a position where the joint (the corner of the triangular prism) between the end on the long side of the first screen member 712 and the end on the long side of the second screen member 714 can be seen in front view. Even if is located, the discomfort that can be imparted by reducing the gap between the long side end of the first screen member 712 and the long side end of the second screen member 714 is reduced. be able to.

  In addition, a groove 7143 is formed in the second screen member 714 along the long side on the back surface on the side to be joined to the third screen member 716. Then, the end of the long side of the third screen member 716 and the end of the long side of the second screen member 714 and the long side of the third screen member 716 are applied to the groove 7143. The ends are joined. As a result, the gap between the two ends that can occur at the joint between the end on the long side of the second screen member 714 and the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 can be filled, and a gap can be formed. The discomfort that can be given by can be reduced.

  Further, a groove 7163 is formed in the third screen member 716 along the long side on the back surface on the side to be joined to the first screen member 712. Then, the end of the long side of the first screen member 712 and the end of the long side of the third screen member 716 and the long side of the first screen member 712 are applied to the groove 7163. The ends are joined. As a result, a gap between the long side end of the third screen member 716 and the long side end of the first screen member 712 can be filled and a gap can be formed. The discomfort that can be given by can be reduced.

  In this way, gaps that may occur at the corners (joint portions) of the triangular columnar columnar screen 710 are filled, so that even when the corners of the columnar screen 710 face the front, the projection from the projector 213 is performed. It is possible to suppress as much as possible that the continuity of the video to be interrupted, and it is possible to reduce discomfort that can be caused by the formation of a gap. Here, “video continuity is interrupted” means that when one image is projected, one image is divided like a shadow or streak that crosses the one image. It is equivalent to doing so. For example, when an unintended shadow or streak that crosses the character's face occurs while the character's face is projected, the projected image is interrupted, giving a sense of incongruity. There is a risk that interest will decline. Therefore, by filling the gaps that may occur at the corners of the prisms, it is possible to maintain the continuity of the video as much as possible, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The second screen member 714 has male ribs 7145 protruding from the back surface at both ends in the longitudinal direction and in the vicinity of the joint portion with the third screen member 716 (for example, FIG. 27 and FIG. 28). reference). In addition, the third screen member 716 is formed with female ribs 7164 (two ribs) protruding from the back surface at portions corresponding to the male ribs 7145 described above (for example, FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, which will be described later). 32). When the ribs 7145 and 7164 are engaged, the male rib 7145 is sandwiched between the female ribs 7164, and the second screen member 714 and the third screen member 716 are firmly joined at both ends in the left-right direction. Is done.

  FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714 are disassembled, FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional perspective view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 29, and FIG. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view in which a first screen member 712 and a third screen member 716 are disassembled.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the second screen member 714 has two rod-like arm members 7144 extending from the back surface toward the flat panel base 7125 side toward the first screen member 712 side in the middle part in the longitudinal direction. Is provided. The arm member 7144 is fixed to the flat panel base 7125 via a screen locking member 718.

  More specifically, the screen locking member 718 is formed with two insertion holes 7182 into which the arm member 7144 can be inserted. A pair of screen locking ribs 7128 for fixing the screen locking member 718 are formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125. Then, the arm member 7144 is inserted into the insertion hole 7182 and screwed with a screw 717, and then a pair of screen locking ribs 7128 and a screen locking member 718 are screwed with screws 719, thereby The first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714 are firmly joined at the middle part in the left-right direction. By the way, when two screen members are joined, there is a gap between the two screen members (especially in the middle part) due to the clearance between the two screen members and the distortion that occurs when coating the screen paint. There is a fear. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714 are firmly joined at the middle part in the left-right direction, and thus the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714 are each. The generation | occurrence | production of the clearance gap between both which may arise in the middle part of the longitudinal direction of can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the three-dimensionally shaped object base 7161 constituting the third screen member 716 has two rod-like shapes extending from the back surface toward the flat panel base 7125 side in the longitudinal middle part. An arm member 7162 is provided. A pair of screen locking ribs 7129 for fixing the screen locking members 718 are formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125. The arm member 7162 is inserted into the insertion hole 7182 of the screen locking member 718 and then screwed with a screw 717, and then a pair of screen locking ribs 7129 and the screen locking member 718 are screwed with screws 719. By stopping, the first screen member 712 and the third screen member 716 are firmly joined at the middle part in the left-right direction. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the clearance gap between both which may arise in the middle part of the longitudinal direction of each of the 1st screen member 712 and the 3rd screen member 716 can be suppressed.

  The column screen 710 of the present embodiment is hollow, but is not limited to this, and is a solid or a mixture of a hollow portion and a solid portion (hereinafter referred to as “half-solid”). May be. For example, when it is desired to increase the rigidity of the column body screen 710, it is preferable that the column body screen 710 be solid, and when it is desired to reduce the weight of the column body screen 710, it is preferable that the column body screen 710 be hollow. Further, the ratio between the hollow portion and the solid portion may be changed as appropriate to reduce the weight as much as possible while maintaining the rigidity of the columnar screen 710. Furthermore, if the three-dimensional shapes of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 are different as in the present embodiment, an imbalance may occur when the column screen 710 is rotated. Therefore, by adjusting the ratio and the location of the solid part and the hollow part, it may be possible to prevent the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 from becoming unbalanced even though the three-dimensional shapes are different.

  The column screen 710 of the present embodiment is a triangular column screen 710, but is not necessarily limited to a triangular column, and may be a quadrangular column screen or a more polygonal column screen. However, considering that the screen on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed may be changed from the current screen to a specific screen, it is preferably a triangular prism body screen. Because in the case of a polygonal cylinder more than a quadrangular prism, it may be forced to go through an irrelevant screen before changing from the current screen to a specific screen, but in the case of a triangular prism You can change from the current screen to a specific screen without going through an irrelevant screen. This is because when the column screen is a triangular prism, any of the three screens is adjacent to the other two screens.

  Further, the column screen 710 of the present embodiment has a column shape, but is not necessarily a column screen. For example, the column screen 710 has a substantially L-shape formed by two screens adjacent to each other. The screen may be a substantially U-shaped screen composed of three screens adjacent to each other.

  Further, in the columnar screen 710 of the present embodiment, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 is flat, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 is concave, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 ( More specifically, the projection surface 7167 of the three-dimensional object 7166. The same applies hereinafter.) Has a convex shape, but is not limited thereto, and is a combination of a plurality of three-dimensional shapes among a flat shape, a concave shape, and a convex shape. May be.

  In addition, the column screen 710 of the present embodiment has all three projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 having different three-dimensional shapes. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the three-dimensional shape of at least one projection surface is other. If it is different from the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface, the visual impression can be changed and the interest can be enhanced. For example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 have the same three-dimensional shape, and only the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 has a different three-dimensional shape. Case corresponds.

  Further, the region size and the material of the projection surface on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed are the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the third screen. The projection surface 7167 of the member 716 may be the same or different.

(1-2) Right Base, Left Base, and Rotating Gear Mechanism With reference to FIG. 25, configurations of the right base 732, the left base 736, and the rotating gear mechanism 740 will be described.

  A trapezoidal right base 732 is attached to the opening end surface on the right side of the columnar screen 710, and a triangular left base 736 is attached to the opening end surface on the left side of the columnar screen 710. The right base 732 is extended with a small and high cylindrical portion 707 that protrudes to the surface side (right outward) of the columnar screen 710. A rotating gear mechanism 740 is fixed to the cylindrical portion 707.

  The right base 732 has a trapezoidal shape having a short side portion 7322 and a long side portion 7324, and two rod-shaped weight members 7326 are provided on the back surface (the left inner side) in the vicinity of the long side portion 7324. . Similarly, the left base 736 has a trapezoidal shape having a short side portion 7362 and a long side portion 7364, and two rod-like weight members 7366 are provided in the vicinity of the long side portion 7364 (right inward). .

  The weight members 7326 and 7366 are provided to balance the rotation of the column body screen 710. That is, the columnar screen 710 of the present embodiment has a different three-dimensional shape of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. There is a possibility that a difference in weight occurs and the rotational balance becomes unbalanced. Such an imbalance is considered to occur when the rotation shaft 722 and the center of gravity in the longitudinal direction of the columnar screen 710 are greatly deviated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the weight members 7326 and 7366 are provided, and the rib group 7126 is formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125 of the first screen member 712, or the three-dimensional object of the third screen member 716 is formed. By providing an opening 7163 in the base 7161, the center of gravity in the longitudinal direction of the columnar screen 710 is brought close to the rotation shaft 722 so that both are as coaxial as possible, and the rotation balance is prevented from becoming unbalanced. doing.

  Note that the number and installation location of the weight members 7326 and 7366, the number and formation location of the rib group 7126, the size and formation location of the opening 7163, and the like may be adjusted as appropriate.

  The column screen 710 has a cylindrical portion 707 and a rotating gear mechanism 740 on the right side (right base 732), but does not exist on the left side (left base 736). When a rotation is attempted, a torsional stress is applied to each screen member 712, 714, 716. In particular, the torsional stress applied to the first screen member 712 having a flat projection surface is considered to be significant. In this regard, in the present embodiment, as described above, the flat panel base 7125 is provided as the base of the flat panel 7121, and the rib group 7126 is formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125, so that the rigidity is increased. . That is, the rib group 7126 has both a function of suppressing the rotation balance from becoming unbalanced and a function of increasing rigidity.

  The first screen member 712 is attached to the back surface (more specifically, the back surface of the flat panel base 7125) at both ends in the longitudinal direction and the end on the side to be joined to the third screen member 716. A defining rib 7122 is formed (see, eg, FIGS. 24-29). The attachment defining rib 7122 has a triangular shape that closes the side surface of the columnar screen 710 by being adjacent to the short sides 7322 and 7362 of the bases 732 and 736. Therefore, when the right base 732 covers the right side surface of the columnar screen 710 with the right base 732, it is possible to easily determine the orientation of the right base 732 only by making the attachment defining rib 7122 and the short side portion 7322 adjacent to each other. In addition, when the left side surface 736 covers the left side surface of the columnar screen 710 with the left base 736, the orientation of the left base 736 is defined only by adjoining the attachment defining rib 7122 and the short side portion 7362.

  The attachment defining rib 7122 has a function of improving workability when the side surface of the columnar screen 710 is closed with the right base 732 and the left base 736, and is formed if the function can be maintained. The location and shape are not limited. For example, such attachment defining ribs 7122 are formed on the back surface of the third screen member 716 at both ends in the longitudinal direction and at the end where the first screen member 712 is joined. Also good. In addition, a part of the attachment defining rib 7122 is formed on the back surface of the first screen member 712 and a part of the attachment defining rib 7122 on the back surface of the third screen member 716 is formed. When the third screen member 716 is joined, an attachment defining rib 7122 that is adjacent to the short side portion 7322 of the right base 732 or the short side portion 7362 of the left base 736 may be formed. Further, an attachment defining rib 7122 may be formed at a joint portion between the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714, or the second screen member 714 and the third screen member 716 may be formed. Attachment defining ribs 7122 may be formed at the joints. Furthermore, the shape of the right base 732 or the left base 736 does not need to be trapezoidal. If the orientation of the right base or the left base can be defined by being adjacent to a positioning member such as the attachment defining rib 7122, the right base, The shape of the left base and the positioning member is not limited to a specific shape, and the number is not limited to one and may be two.

  The rotating gear mechanism 740 includes a large-diameter gear 742 and a gear-shaped portion 744 having a smaller diameter than that of the large-diameter gear 742, and the cylindrical portion 707 so as to be coaxial with the rotating shaft 722 of the columnar screen 710. It is fixed to.

  The large-diameter gear 742 has teeth formed on the entire circumference at a pitch of 5 degrees, and the gear-shaped portion 744 has protrusions 7442 protruding outward in the radial direction at a pitch of 10 degrees. That is, 72 teeth of 742 of the large-diameter gear 7 are formed at approximately equal intervals over the entire circumference, and 36 protrusions 7442 of the gear-shaped portion 744 are formed at approximately equal intervals over the entire periphery. However, the pitch of the teeth of the large-diameter gear 742 and the pitch of the protrusions 7442 formed on the gear-shaped portion 744 are not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate. The function of the gear-shaped portion 744 will be described later.

(2) Screen drive base, fixed base and upper base The screen drive base, fixed base and upper base will be described with reference to FIG.

  The screen drive base (the left screen drive base 702 and the right screen drive base 704) supports the rotating shaft 722 on both the left and right sides, and supports the movable screen unit 700, the fixed base 708, and the upper base 706 on both the left and right sides. Yes. More specifically, the left and right ends of each of the fixed base 708 and the upper base 706 are fixed by the left screen drive base 702 and the right screen drive base 704, and the movable screen unit 700 is installed in the internal space of the assembly of the plurality of bases. Is stored.

  The fixed base 708 is positioned below the movable screen unit 700, and the surface 7084 on the movable screen unit 700 side is formed in a curved shape so as not to prevent the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. A rectangular lower screen 7082 that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is provided at the front end of the fixed base 708. The lower screen 7082 functions as a projection surface on which an image projected from the projector 213 is displayed together with any one of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 of the screen members 712, 714, and 716. That is, one of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167 of the screen members 712, 714, 716 and the lower screen 7082 form one projection surface (projection surface). However, the lower screen 7082 does not move (rotates) like the movable screen unit 700 (columnar screen 710), and functions as a fixed screen on which image light is projected from the projector 213.

  Note that there are a plurality of undulations on the surface of the lower screen 7082, which is a curved surface that curves in the front-rear direction. As a result, a three-dimensional effect can also be produced in the image projected on the lower screen 7082. However, the present invention is not intended to exclude the case where the lower screen 7082 is flat.

  The upper base 706 has a substantially L-shaped cross section that crosses the longitudinal direction (left-right direction), and the surface 7084 on the movable screen unit 700 side is curved so as not to prevent the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. Is formed.

(3) Drive mechanism The structure of the drive mechanism 815 is demonstrated referring FIG.33 and FIG.34. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right screen drive base 704 and the drive mechanism 815. FIG. 34 is a perspective view of the movable screen unit 700 viewed from the right side. However, in FIG. 34, illustration of a motor base 816, a motor 812, and a stopper mechanism 790, which will be described later, is omitted.

  The drive mechanism 815 is provided on the right screen drive base 704, and rotates the movable screen unit 700 (see, for example, FIG. 21) forward or backward about a rotation shaft 722 (see, for example, FIG. 21) as a rotation center. The projection plane on which the image light projected from the projector 213 is displayed (projected) can be switched. In the present embodiment, when the movable screen unit 700 is viewed from the right side, the clockwise rotation is the forward rotation (rotation in the direction in which the column screen 710 moves from bottom to top in front view), and the counterclockwise direction. The rotation around is defined as reverse rotation (rotation in a direction in which the column screen 710 moves from top to bottom in front view).

  The drive mechanism 815 mainly includes a motor 812 as a drive source for rotating the movable screen unit 700 (see, for example, FIG. 21), a speed reduction mechanism 818, and an intermediate gear 820.

  The motor 812 is a stepping motor having a drive shaft 814 and is attached to the right screen drive base 704 via a motor base 816 and a mechanism cover 810 described later. A gear group such as the speed reduction mechanism 818 and the intermediate gear 820 is covered with a mechanism cover 810.

  The speed reduction mechanism 818 includes a speed reduction gear 8182 and a driven gear 8184, and is rotatably supported by the right screen drive base 704 via a bearing 819. The intermediate gear 820 is rotatably supported on the right screen drive base 704 via a bearing 821.

  A motor base 816 to which a motor 812 is attached is assembled to the mechanism cover 810. The rotation shaft (drive shaft 814) of the motor passes through the mechanism cover 810 and meshes with the driven gear 8184 to rotate the reduction gear 8182. The reduction gear 8182 meshes with the intermediate gear 820, and the intermediate gear 820 meshes with the large-diameter gear 742 of the rotation gear mechanism 740 of the right base 732 (see, for example, FIG. 25). The right screen drive base 704 is provided with a case region 830 that houses the rotation gear mechanism 740.

  A lower notch 832 is formed obliquely below and to the right of the case region 830. The large-diameter gear 742 is partially exposed to the lower notch 832 and meshed with the intermediate gear 820. Accordingly, when the motor 812 rotates, the large-diameter gear 742 rotates through the speed reduction mechanism 818 and the intermediate gear 820 based on the rotation of the drive shaft 814. The large diameter gear 742 is a movable screen unit by rotating a right base 732 (for example, see FIGS. 24 and 25) to which the large diameter gear 742 is fixed via a cylindrical portion 707 (for example, see FIG. 25). 700 rotates about the rotation shaft 722 as a center (axis).

  Here, the sub control board 72 outputs a motor drive control signal to the drive driver of the motor 812, and controls the rotation direction and rotation angle of the drive shaft 814. An upper notch 834 is formed in the upper part of the case region 830, and a part of the rotating gear mechanism 740 is exposed here. As will be described in detail later, a stopper mechanism 790 described later engages with the gear-shaped portion 744 of the rotating gear mechanism 740 via the upper notch portion 834 to prevent the movable screen unit 700 from rotating to the current position. It can be fastened.

(4) Rotation Axis FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the projection block 203 as seen from above when cut in the horizontal direction so as to include the rotation axis 722. The left end of the rotation shaft 722 passes through the left base center hole 739 of the left base 736 and is fixed to the boss portion 739A of the left screen drive base 702. The right end of the rotation shaft 722 passes through the center of the right base 732 (right base center hole 735) and the center of the rotation gear mechanism 740 and is fixed to the right screen drive base 704. The rotation shaft 722 is supported by the left base center hole 739 of the left base 736 via the left bearing 852 and is supported by the center hole 7402 of the rotation gear mechanism 740 via the right bearing 724. Thereby, the movable screen unit 700 can rotate forward or backward about the rotation shaft 722 as a center (axis). That is, the screen unit 700 (columnar screen 710) that can rotate about the rotation shaft 722 constitutes a movable member.

  Note that the movable screen unit 700 (column body screen 710) of this embodiment only rotates forward or backward about the rotation shaft 722, but is not limited to rotation, and is driven to move, for example, a position. It may be a thing.

  A coil spring 725 is provided at the left end of the rotating shaft 722. The coil spring 725 is housed in the case body 854. The case body 854 has a left end that is not in contact with the boss portion 739A and a right end that is in contact with the left bearing 852, so that a constant distance can be maintained between the left base 736 and the left screen drive base 702. The left base 736 can be prevented from coming into contact with the left screen drive base 702. The coil spring 725 absorbs backlash in the left-right direction.

(5) Stopper Mechanism The configuration of the stopper mechanism 790 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the right side surface of the projection target block 203 as viewed from the front side. In FIG. 36, the right screen drive base 704 is not shown. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a state where the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is not blocked by the stopper mechanism 790. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a state where the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is blocked by the stopper mechanism 790. FIG. 39 is an enlarged view of a portion X shown in FIG.

  The stopper mechanism 790 includes a solenoid 792 that can be operated in the vertical direction, and a stopper 794 that moves up and down as the solenoid 792 moves up and down. After the solenoid 792 and the stopper 794 are accommodated in the case body 796, Attached to the right screen drive base 704.

  The solenoid 792 has a plunger 7922 (see, for example, FIGS. 37 and 38) positioned upward in an excited state where the coil is energized, and the plunger 7922 is directed downward when the coil is de-energized. Operates (falls).

  The stopper 794 is provided below the main body portion 7942 and connected to the main body portion 7942 so that it can move up and down in accordance with the vertical movement of the solenoid 792 (plunger 7922). And a stopper pin 7944 that moves up and down.

  The stopper mechanism 790 is disposed immediately above the gear shape portion 744. More specifically, the stopper mechanism 790 is arranged so that the stopper pin 7944 can advance and retract with respect to the gear-shaped portion 744. In the stopper mechanism 790, the stopper pin 7944 has one projection 7442 and another projection 7442 adjacent to the one projection 7442 in a state where the projection surface of the movable screen member 700 is at the projection plane origin position described later. It is comprised so that it may become the positional relationship which opposes the groove | channel 7444 between them up and down.

  The sub-control board 72 uses a projection plane (any one of the projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167) on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed as another projection plane (the other projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167). When the screen is changed to the projection plane, the motor 812 is driven to rotate the movable screen unit 700. As will be described in detail later, the sub-control board 72 sets the solenoid 792 in a non-excited state after a predetermined time has elapsed since execution of the control to stop the movable screen unit 700 at the target position (predetermined specified position). The stopper pin 7944 is advanced with respect to the gear shape portion 744 in the radially inner direction (downward) of the gear shape portion 744. When the stopper pin 7944 that has advanced with respect to the gear-shaped portion 744 engages with the groove 7444, the movable screen unit 700 is prevented from rotating in a state where the projection surface of the movable screen member 700 is at the projection plane origin position described later. . In this way, the sub-control board 72 can reliably stop the movable screen unit 700 at a desired rotational position without being displaced.

  By the way, the stopper mechanism 790 has a knob 795 that can manually move the stopper pin 7944 up and down. Therefore, even if a displacement occurs when the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped, the stopper pin 7944 that has advanced with respect to the gear-shaped portion 744 can be retracted by moving the knob 795 upward. When the stopper pin 7944 is retracted from the gear-shaped portion 744, the movable screen unit 700 can be manually rotated, so that the above-described positional deviation can be corrected.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 39, the stopper pin 7944 is cut (chamfered) so that the corner of the tip portion tapers toward the tip portion. Thereby, even if the stopper 794 is caught in the middle of advancement and the advancement becomes incomplete, if the protrusion 7442 acts on the stopper pin 7944 by the rotation of the gear-shaped portion 744, the stopper pin 7944 is easily Thus, the operation failure of the movable screen unit 700 can be suppressed. In addition to this, the tip of the protrusion 7442 of the gear-shaped portion 744 is also cut so as to taper toward the tip. Therefore, when the stopper 794 advances with respect to the gear-shaped portion 744, it is possible to prevent the stopper 794 from being caught in the middle until the stopper 794 engages with the groove 7444.

  Further, the projection 7442 of the gear-shaped portion 744 has an inclined portion 74421 that is inclined so as to swell in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) from the proximal end portion toward the distal end portion. That is, the groove 7444 between one protrusion 7442 and another protrusion 7442 adjacent to the one protrusion has a bowl-like shape whose width in the circumferential direction decreases from the radially inner side to the radially outer side. ing. Therefore, once the stopper pin 7944 is engaged with the groove 7444, even if the stopper pin 7944 acts on the stopper pin 7944, the stopper pin 7944 can be prevented from being easily pushed upward.

  As described above, the protruding portion 7442 of the gear-shaped portion 744 has the inclined portion 74421 that is inclined so as to bulge in the circumferential direction from the proximal end portion toward the distal end portion, but the stopper pin 7944 is shown in FIG. As described above, the upper side of the cut end portion extends in a substantially vertical direction without inclining. Therefore, when the stopper pin 7944 and the protruding portion 7442 come into contact with each other, the corner portion 74422 formed at the radially outer end of the inclined portion 74421 of the protruding portion 7442 and the stopper pin 7944 come into contact with each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an inclined portion may be formed on the side surface of the stopper pin 7944 (the surface that contacts the protruding portion 7442) so that the surface contacts when the stopper pin 7944 contacts the protruding portion 7442. .

(6) Optical Sensor Unit With reference to FIGS. 33, 34 and 40, the configuration of the optical sensor unit 800 will be described. FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the movable screen unit as viewed from the right side, and shows the optical sensor unit 800 so that it can be visually recognized. The optical sensor unit 800 detects the position of the rotating movable screen unit 700 in the rotational direction, and uses the optical sensor to block the optical path between the light emitting element and the light receiving element of the optical sensor. Is detected, and the position is detected based on the timing when the optical path is blocked.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the optical sensor unit 800, three optical sensors 802, 804, and 806 are arranged radially at equiangular intervals on the right screen drive base 704. The optical sensor 802 detects that the projection plane 7123 of the first screen member 712 is located at the projection plane origin position described later, and the optical sensor 804 detects that the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714 is described later. The light sensor 806 detects that the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 is located at the projection surface origin position described later. The optical sensor unit 800 is inserted and fixed in a radial groove 801 formed on the end surface of the case region 830 of the rotation gear mechanism 740 of the right screen drive base 704. That is, each optical sensor does not rotate with respect to the rotating movable screen unit 700.

  On the end face of the rotation gear mechanism 740 provided on the right base 732 (for example, see FIG. 24), a small arc-shaped light shielding piece 791 is provided to project at a right angle toward the optical sensor unit 800 side. The light shielding piece 791 has a width (length) of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The light shielding piece 791 blocks the optical paths of the three optical sensors 802, 804, and 806 in order in the process of moving the light shielding piece 791 by the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. Since the optical path is blocked when the light shielding piece 791 passes between the light emitting element and the light receiving element, the sub-control board 72 that monitors the detection signal from the optical sensor has reached which optical sensor the light shielding piece 791 has reached. Can be determined. As described above, since the three optical sensors 802, 804, and 806 correspond to the screen members 712, 714, and 716, the sub-control board 72 depends on which optical sensor the light shielding piece 791 blocks in the rotation direction. The position of the movable screen unit 700 can be determined.

  That is, each of the optical sensors 802, 804, and 806 that can detect that the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 are located at the projection surface origin positions described later are the first position detection means to the first position detection means. 3 position detection means is configured. In addition, the light shielding piece 791 detected by each of the optical sensors 802, 804, and 806 rotating with the rotation of the column body screen 710 constitutes a position detection member.

  Further, when one end of the light shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction reaches one of the optical sensors (one of the optical sensors 802, 804, and 806), the tip of the screen appears on the front side, If the other end of the screen comes out of the front side when the other end of the light-shielding piece is separated from the optical sensor, the sub-control board 72 is based on the output timing of the optical sensor and the number of pulses of the motor drive signal. The position where the screen is present can be determined with high accuracy. Accordingly, the sub control board 72 can accurately project the image light on the screen, and can change the image light in accordance with the position of the screen.

  Further, as described above, the light shielding piece 791 has a length of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction. The rotation stop control of the movable screen unit 700 by the sub-control board 72 is based on the fact that one end of the light shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction has reached the optical sensor (one of the optical sensors 802, 804, and 806). However, the length of the light shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction takes into account the time until the movable screen unit 700 decelerates and actually stops. In this embodiment, since the length of the light shielding piece 791 has a length of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction, it was performed in response to the fact that one end of the light shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction reached the optical sensor. However, the movable screen unit 700 has a predetermined position (for example, a position where the light shielding piece 791 rotates about 25 degrees in the same direction after one end of the light shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction reaches the optical sensor). It is possible to perform control to stop at approximately the center position)). The specified position corresponds to a projection plane origin position described later. Further, if the light shielding piece 791 does not block the optical sensor when the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped, the sub control board 72 determines that a positional deviation has occurred and prompts the correction of the positional deviation. it can. Therefore, for example, even if a trouble such as displacement occurs, it is possible to correct the displacement immediately. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a higher visual image effect than before.

  The specified position is not limited to the center position in the circumferential direction (length direction) of the light shielding piece 791, but is a position shifted from the center position in the circumferential direction (length direction) of the light shielding piece 791. There may be.

(7) Operation Explanation of Movable Screen Unit The operation of the movable screen unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 is a diagram in which a front view and a right side view of the block to be projected 203 are arranged side by side, and is a view when the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 faces the front. FIG. 42 is a diagram in which a front view and a right side view of the projection block 203 are arranged side by side. The long side end of the first screen member 712 and the long side end of the second screen member 714 are shown. It is a figure when the junction part (corner | corner part of a triangular prism) with a part faces the front. FIG. 43 is a diagram in which a front view and a right side view of the projection target block 203 are arranged side by side, and is a view when the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 faces the front.

  When the motor 812 (see, for example, FIG. 36) rotates, the large-diameter gear 742 provided on the right base 732 is rotated by the operation of each member constituting the drive mechanism 815, and the movable screen unit 700 is centered on the rotation shaft 722. Rotate.

  The sub control board 72 can operate the movable screen unit 700 according to the gaming state. For example, in a general gaming state (for example, a non-ART gaming state), the movable screen unit 700 is kept stopped with the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 facing the front, which is more advantageous than the general gaming state. In a high notification game state (for example, ART game state, etc.), the second screen member 714 keeps the movable screen unit 700 stopped with the front facing the front, and the special notification game state is more advantageous than the notification game state. In (for example, a specialization zone etc.), the stop of the movable screen unit 700 can be maintained with the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 facing the front.

  Then, when the gaming state shifts to another gaming state, the sub-control board 72 performs control to rotate the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection surface onto which the image projected by the projector 213 is projected faces. Run.

  Since the sub-control board 72 continuously projects the image projected from the projector 213 when the movable screen unit 700 is rotated, the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 can be visually recognized in front view. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 42, an image projected on both the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 can be viewed.

  The sub-control board 72 can project a video corresponding to the projection plane to be projected (video corresponding to the gaming state) as a video projected from the projector 213. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 42, it is advantageous when images projected on both the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 can be viewed. It is possible to simultaneously view a plurality of game state videos having different degrees.

  In addition, the sub-control board 72 performs an effect that causes the movable screen unit 700 to rattle (for example, an effect that quickly and repeatedly operates forward rotation and reverse rotation, hereinafter referred to as “rattling effect”). It is possible to perform an effect that expects whether or not to shift. In particular, in the pachislot of this embodiment, as described above, the light shielding piece 791 has a length of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction. In the case of a triangular prism, it is necessary to rotate about 120 degrees in order to rotate the movable screen unit 700 from one projection plane to another projection plane. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 can execute an effect of rotating the movable screen unit 700 forward and backward within a range of approximately 70 degrees.

  For example, when the right end of the light shielding piece 791 shields the optical sensor 804, both the projection surface 7123 and the projection surface 7141 can be viewed in front view, but the projection surface 7141 is more than the projection surface 7123. Easy to see. In addition, when the left end of the light shielding piece 791 shields the optical sensor 802, both the projection surface 7123 and the projection surface 7141 can be viewed in front view, but the projection surface 7123 is more than the projection surface 7141. Easy to see. Therefore, depending on the game state transition expectation, by changing the projection plane that is easy to view between the two projection planes (for example, the projection plane 7123 and the projection plane 7141), the presentation is performed with high interest. be able to. For example, when it is determined that the sub-control board 72 shifts from the general game state to the notification game state, the projection surface 7141 is more likely to be visually recognized than the projection surface 7123 at a high frequency. When it is not determined to shift from the general gaming state to the notification gaming state, the projection surface 7123 is more likely to be visually recognized than the projection surface 7141 at a high frequency. Amusement entertainment can be enhanced.

  By the way, the image light projected from the projector 213 is reflected and projected onto the reflection mirror 237 (see FIG. 7) disposed on the upper front side, and thus projected at a predetermined angle toward the projection plane. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 42, when the corner of the triangular prism is facing the front, a shadow is easily formed according to the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface. In particular, the projection plane 7141 and the projection plane 7167 are notable because the projection plane is not a flat shape but a three-dimensional shape. Even when the corners of the triangular prism are not facing the front, the projection surface has a three-dimensional shape. Therefore, when the image light projected from the projector 213 is projected onto the projection surface, it becomes a shadow. There may be a shadow area where no image is projected. The shadow area formed in this way can occur even if some image light is projected from the projector 213. For example, it may be possible to project image light from which the shadow area is formed from the projector 213, but such an image is projected from the projector 213 because the projection surface has a three-dimensional shape of a convex portion or a concave portion. Even without projecting light, it is possible to produce an effect using a shadow area by utilizing the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface. The effect using the shadow area is, for example, a hidden video effect in which an image indicating the degree of expectation is hidden by projecting image light indicating the degree of expectation of the gaming state from the projector 213 to an area where the shadow area is formed. It can be carried out. Then, when performing a rattling effect (step numbers 1 to 50 in a motor sequence table MT15 in FIG. 70 described later) while performing a hidden image effect, an effect can be performed in which an image indicating the degree of expectation can be seen or not seen. It can enhance interest.

  In the present invention, the terms “projection area” and “projection plane” are both used, but the terms “projection area” and “projection plane” are both used in two dimensions and three dimensions. It is for distinguishing. That is, one is a two-dimensional concept and the other is a three-dimensional concept including a three-dimensional shape. Here, the “projection area” may be two-dimensional and the “projection plane” may be three-dimensional, or the “projection area” may be three-dimensional and the “projection plane” may be two-dimensional. For example, if the “projection area” is “a three-dimensional shape onto which image light projected from the projector 213 is projected”, the “projection plane” is “when the image projected from the projector 213 is viewed in front view”. 2D image ". If the “projection area” is “a two-dimensional image when the image projected from the projector 213 is viewed from the front”, the “projection plane” is a solid on which the image projected from the projector 213 is projected. Shape ".

(8) Projection Surface 7141 and Image Example Projected on Projection Surface 7167 FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of an image projected on the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and (B) a third screen. It is a figure which shows the example of an image projected on the projection surface 7161 of the member 716. FIG.

  In FIG. 44A, since the projection surface 7141 is concave, an image with a sense of depth is projected on the projection surface 7141. In FIG. 44B, the book is shaped as a three-dimensional object, and the image projected as if the page of the book is turned by the image projected from the projector 213 provides a highly realistic effect. It can be performed.

  Even when any projection plane including the projection plane 7123 is facing the front, for example, as shown in FIG. 44, any one of the projection planes (projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167) of the movable screen unit 700 is used. ) And the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 form one projection plane. Here, the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 is variable by rotating the movable screen unit 700 as described above. On the other hand, the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 is a projection surface that can always be projected without being activated. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 forms one projection plane by both the projection plane of the movable screen unit 700 (any one of the projection planes 7123, 7141, and 7167) and the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708. However, it is possible to execute an effect of changing only the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 in a state where the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 is fixed.

  For example, the sub-control board 72 projects an information image not related to the result of the internal lottery, such as credit data or BET number display, onto the lower screen 7082, and produces an effect image corresponding to the result of the internal lottery on the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700. Projection can be performed on any one of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167. In addition, the sub control board 72 may perform, for example, navigation display in the pressing order of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R (for example, see FIG. 2) in the undulating portion of the lower screen 7082 that functions as a fixed screen. In this way, by using the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082 functioning as a fixed screen, the information image is always projected while changing the projected image as the game progresses. can do. For example, in the case of a liquid crystal display, since it does not rotate like the movable screen unit 700 of this embodiment, it is possible to always display an information image by display control. However, it is difficult to maintain the information image in an easy-to-view manner when the projection screen moves and changes like the movable screen unit 700 as in the present embodiment. In this regard, as in the present embodiment, the projection screen of the movable screen unit 700 and the projection screen of both the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 form one projection plane, but the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 is formed. By changing only the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 in a state where is fixed, it is possible to maintain the information image in an easily viewable manner while changing the effect image.

  An effect image corresponding to the result of the internal lottery is projected on both the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082, while an information image not related to the result of the internal lottery is projected only on the lower screen 7082. Alternatively, both the effect image according to the result of the internal lottery and the information image not related to the result of the internal lottery may be projected on both the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082. .

<Front panel>
FIG. 45 is a front view of the front panel 500 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 46 is a perspective view seen from the upper right side. As shown in FIGS. 45 and X + 1, the front panel 500 includes a display device cover 30 on the front side of the front panel 500, and a front effect is provided in a region behind the display device cover 30 (inside the pachislot machine). A unit 900 is provided.

  The configuration of the front effect unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. FIG. 47 is a front view of the front effect unit 900. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the front effect unit 900.

  The front effect unit 900 includes a left light effect unit 900L, a right light effect unit 900R, and a bottom plate 904. The bottom plate 904 has a plate shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is arranged so that the top and bottom surfaces are flat. On both ends of the bottom plate 904 in the longitudinal direction, a left side light effect unit 900L and a right side light effect unit 900R are respectively erected substantially vertically upward.

  Also, a left mounting member 905L is fixed to the upper end of the left light effect unit 900L, and a right mounting member 905R is fixed to the upper end of the right light effect unit 900R. A cover 906 is attached to the bottom plate 904 from below.

  Thus, the front effect unit 900 is configured as a substantially U-shape, and the opening 10a (for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 4, FIG. 4) of the front panel 500 from the back surface of the front door 2a (for example, FIG. 2). 49)). 49 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG.

(1) Right Light Effect Unit The configuration of the right light effect unit 900R will be described with reference to FIGS. The left light effect unit 900L and the right light effect unit 900R have substantially the same configuration, although there are differences in the number of light guide plates. Here, the right light effect unit 900R will be described in detail, and the left light effect unit 900L. Will be briefly described later. 50 and 51 are exploded perspective views of the right light effect unit 900R, and the viewing directions are different between FIG. 50 and FIG. FIG. 52 is a front view of the right light effect unit 900R. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the light guide plate 911, the light guide plate cover 936, and the LED substrate 922 (all of which will be described later). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the LED substrate 922, the light guide plate cover 936, and the light guide plate 911. FIG. 55 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. FIG. 56 is a perspective view showing a state in which the LED substrate 922 and the right light guide plate subunit 910R are assembled. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the right light effect unit 900R viewed from the direction of arrow 990 in FIG.

  The right light effect unit 900R realizes a predetermined light effect on the right side when viewed from the front of the front panel 500 (for example, see FIG. 45). The right light effect unit 900R includes an LED substrate 922 on which a large number of LEDs 921 are arranged and a lens 928 described later. A right lens subunit 912R in which a light emission effect is performed, and a right light guide plate subunit 910R in which a light emission effect by a light guide plate 911 described later is performed.

  In the right light effect unit 900R, when the right light guide plate subunit 910R is inclined with respect to the right lens subunit 912R and viewed from the player's line of sight, the right light guide plate subunit 910R and the right lens subunit 912R overlap. (See, for example, FIG. 49 and FIG. 55). In addition, since the right light guide plate subunit 910R is disposed on the player side, the right lens subunit 912R is visible behind the right light guide plate subunit 910R.

  The right light guide plate subunit 910R and the right lens subunit 912R are unitized by using the same LED substrate 922.

(1-1) LED board As shown in FIGS. 50 and 53 to 57, for example, the LED board 922 has a rectangular shape, and the LEDs arranged on the LED board 922 face the front of the pachislot machine. Be placed. That is, the LED substrate 922 is disposed so that the surface on which the LEDs are disposed is along a two-dimensional surface including the left-right direction and the up-down direction in front view (facing in front view).

  The LED substrate 922 is provided with a large number of LEDs 921 arranged on the surface for each system (details will be described later). The LED substrate 922 is accommodated in an LED substrate cover 920 that covers the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the LED substrate 922 has LEDs 921 arranged to guide light to the right lens subunit 912R in the right region 9222 from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front. An LED 921 that guides light to the right light guide plate subunit 910R is disposed in the left region 9224. The right region 9222 has LED rows of a first row 923A, a second row 923B, and a third row 923C from the right side to the left side in a front view, and the left region 9224 has a left side from the right side in a front view. The LED rows of the fourth row 923D, the fifth row 923E, and the sixth row 923F are provided.

(1-2) Right Lens Subunit As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the right lens subunit 912R includes three light guide lenses 924 (right column) that conduct light from the LEDs 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922. The light guide lens 924A, the middle row light guide lens 924B, and the left row light guide lens 924C) and the light guide lenses 924A and 924B so as to suppress leakage of light conducted through the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C. , 924C, a light guide lens reflector 926, and a lens 928 in which three lenses 928A, 928B, 928C having a substantially semicircular cross section and a hollow cylinder are adjacently arranged in parallel in a stepped manner are inserted therethrough. And a lens base 930 for supporting.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the three light guide lenses 924 are arranged such that the right column light guide lens 924A faces the LEDs 921 arranged in the first column 923A of the LED substrate 922 (more specifically, a small column body 925A described later is provided). LED 921 is opposed), middle row light guide lens 924B is opposed to LED 921 arranged in second row 923B of LED substrate 922 (more specifically, small column body 925B described later is opposed to LED 921), and left column light guide The lenses 924 </ b> C are arranged so as to face the LEDs 921 arranged in the first row 923 </ b> A (FIG. 52) of the LED substrate 922 (more specifically, a small column body 925 </ b> C described later faces the LEDs 921).

  The right column light guide lens 924A has a plurality of columnar small columns 925A extending toward the LED substrate 922 along the longitudinal direction, and the middle column light guide lens 924B extends toward the LED substrate 922. A plurality of columnar small columnar bodies 925B are formed along the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of columnar small columnar bodies 925C extending toward the LED substrate 922 are formed along the longitudinal direction on the left column light guide lens 924C. . Here, since the lens 928 has three lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C arranged adjacent to each other in a staircase shape, the shortest length (horizontal) from each small columnar body 925A, 925B, and 925C to the LED substrate 922 is horizontal. The length in the direction, hereinafter simply referred to as “length”) varies depending on each lens 928.

  For example, in the right column light guide lens 924A arranged corresponding to the right column lens 928A farthest from the LED substrate 922, the length of the small column body 925A is the small column body 925B of the other light guide lenses 924B and 924C. , 925C, the light from the LED 921 can be conducted to the small column body 925A and can be guided to the back of the right column lens 928A. Further, the left column light guide lens 924C arranged corresponding to the left column lens 928C closest to the LED substrate 922 has a small column body 925C having a small column body 925A, 925B of the other light guide lenses 924A, 924B. It is smaller, and the light from the LED 921 can be conducted to the small column body 925C and guided to the vicinity of the back surface of the left column lens 928C. Further, in the middle row light guide lens 924B arranged corresponding to the middle row lens 928B, the length of the small column body 925B is smaller than that of the right row light guide lens 924A but larger than that of the left row light guide lens 924C. The light from the LED 921 can be conducted to the small column body 925C and guided to the vicinity of the back surface of the middle row lens 928B.

  The light from the LED 921 disposed on the LED substrate 922 is emitted from each of the lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C through the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 928A emits light at the position farthest from the LED board 922 (frontmost position), the left column lens 928C emits light at the position closest to the LED board 922 (most rearward position), and the middle row lens 928B is in the middle. It emits light at the position.

  By the way, although the light emission position of each lens 928A, 928B, 928C can be changed by arranging a plurality of lenses 928 in a stepwise manner, there is a possibility that the light emission intensity may vary. That is, although light is supplied to the lens 928 from the LED substrate 922, light is attenuated according to the distance from the LED substrate 922 to the lens 928, and thus the right column having the longest length from the LED substrate 922 is used. There is a possibility that the light emission amount of the lens 928A decreases, and the light emission intensity between the lenses 928 may be unbalanced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C are interposed between the lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C and the LED substrate 922 so that the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C are LEDs. The light emitted from the LED 921 arranged on the substrate 922 is taken in, guided to the vicinity of the back surface of each lens 928A, 928B, 928C and emitted. In this manner, the light emitted from the LED 921 disposed on the LED substrate 922 is guided to the vicinity of the back surface of each of the lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C while suppressing light attenuation by the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C. Thus, even if the light emission position of the lens 928 is far from the LED 922 substrate, the light emission intensity is not lowered. As a result, it is possible to emit light with substantially uniform emission intensity at a position where the length from the LED substrate 922 is different, even though the light source is a single LED substrate 922. .

  As shown in FIG. 50, the light guide lens reflector 926 includes a right row light guide lens 924A, a middle row light guide lens 924B, and a left row light guide lens 924C arranged in this order from the right side surface of the LED substrate 922. Each light guide lens is accommodated so as to be opposed to the LED substrate 922.

  The lens base 930 is fixed so that the lens 928 covers the light guide lens reflector 926. The lens base 930 has the end surfaces of the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C in the vicinity of the back surfaces of the lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C, with the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C facing the LED substrate 922. I am doing so. Each lens 928A, 928B, 928C is engraved with a pattern as if a plurality of sine waves overlapped, and when the LED 921 emits light, the pattern corresponding to the emission color can be viewed through the light guide plate 911. it can.

(1-3) Right Light Guide Plate Subunit As shown in FIGS. 53 and 55, the right light guide plate subunit 910R includes a plurality of light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C stacked on each other. The right light guide plate subunit 910R has the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, when viewed from the front of the pachislot with the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 facing the LED substrate 922 facing each other. The flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are placed on the LED substrate 922 from the rear to the front so that the light plates 911A, 911B, and 911C and the lens 928 can be seen to overlap each other. It is inclined and arranged in a direction that spreads outward (right side of the front view).

  Thus, by inclining the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 with respect to the LED substrate 922, the light guide plate 911 and the lens 928 use the same LED substrate 922 as a light source, and the light guide plate The lens 928 can be visually recognized through the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the 911 so that a mixed effect of the light guide plates 911A, 911B and 911C and the lens 928 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are inclined with respect to the LED substrate 922. However, the light source is not LEDs but diffuses light as compared to LEDs such as lamps. In the case of a light source, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 may be inclined with respect to a virtual two-dimensional surface where the light of each lamp is most concentrated in a plurality of lamps. Further, even if the light source is an LED, when the LEDs are arranged with an inclination with respect to the LED substrate, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are inclined with respect to the LED substrate. Instead, it is preferable that the plurality of LEDs are inclined with respect to a virtual two-dimensional plane on which the light of each LED is most concentrated. However, each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 921, but is taken in from the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side (input) It is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the light.

  In addition, the light guide plate 911 forms irregularities on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 in a predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc., and transmits light from the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side along the surface. By doing so (for example, when the LED 921 is turned on), the predetermined shape, pattern, character, and the like appear on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3. In the present embodiment, a specific portion of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 is subjected to a non-transparent process in which a non-transparent material (for example, a silver metal foil) is deposited by hot stamping, for example. ing. Thereby, when the LED 921 disposed opposite to the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911 is turned on, the non-transparent region where the hot stamping foil exists is three-dimensional by the light transmission region around it. And the aspect which stood out conspicuously can be created.

  “When the LED 921 is turned on, the predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. appear on each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3” means that each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 is normal (for example, when the LED 921 is extinguished). Is not limited to a mode in which a predetermined shape, pattern, character, or the like appears on each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 at a specific time (for example, when the LED 921 is turned on). For example, even during normal times, the predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. can be visually recognized by the incident light of disturbance light, and the predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. can be visually recognized at a specific time. An aspect of being able to do so is also included.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined shape, pattern, character, or the like is formed on each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a transparent paint, a transparent member, etc. However, it is possible that the image can be visually recognized at a specific time.

  In addition, “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display. However, in this specification, an image displayed indirectly or directly by a light source such as an LED may be used. This is called “image”. Accordingly, by transmitting light from the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911 along the surface, predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, and the like appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 are also included in the image. It is.

  In this embodiment, the non-permeable treatment is performed using the hot stamping foil. Instead, for example, when a thin colored metal is vapor-deposited, the portion where the metal is vapor-deposited By transmitting the light, it is also possible to configure so that the light of the LED that transmits the metal and the light that transmits the light guide plate 911 exist in the light transmission region.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 53, the light guide plate cover 936 accommodates three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, and the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 on the proximal end side of the respective light guide plates 911 are LED substrates. 922. The side surface 911A1 on the proximal end side of the first light guide plate 911A is opposed to the fourth row 923D of the LED substrate 922, the side surface 911B1 on the proximal end side of the second light guide plate 911B is opposed to the fifth row 923E, and the third side. The side surface 911C1 on the proximal end side of the light guide plate 911C faces the sixth row 923F. In this way, the plurality of light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are overlapped with each other, and are directed from the base end side of each light guide plate 911A, 911B, 911C to the other end side (hereinafter referred to as “non-base end side”). By tilting away from the LED board 922, when the LED 921 arranged on the LED board 922 is turned on, the pattern appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C It will be visually recognized from the viewpoint with parallax (deviation), and a stereoscopic effect can be achieved.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the flat surface 911A3 of the first light guide plate 911A has a first circular hole 9112A on the upper end side and the base end side, and a second circular opening on the upper end side and the non-base end side. The hole 9114A is formed with a third circular opening 9116A on the lower end side and the base end side, and a fourth circular opening 9118A on the lower end and the base end side. The flat surface 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B has a first circular hole 9112B on the upper end side and the base end side, a second circular hole 9114B on the upper end side and the base end side, and a lower end side and a base side. A third circular opening 9116B is formed on the end side, and a fourth circular opening 9118B is formed on the lower end and the base end side. Similarly, the flat surface 911C3 of the third light guide plate 911C has a first circular hole 9112C on the upper end side and the base end side, a second circular hole 9114C on the upper end side and the base end side, and a lower end side and A third circular opening 9116C is formed on the base end side, and a fourth circular opening 9118C is formed on the lower end and the base end side.

  Further, locking members (upper locking members 938, 911) that connect the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C with the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 facing each other at the upper end and the lower end of the light guide plate cover 936, respectively. A lower locking member 940) is attached. The upper locking member 938 is formed with a protruding member 9382 on the proximal end side and a protruding member 9384 on the opposite proximal side, and the lower locking member 930 has a protruding member 9402 on the proximal end side and an opposite proximal side. The protruding member 9404 is formed.

  Then, a base-side protruding member 9382 formed in the upper locking member 938 passes through each first circular hole 9112A, 9112B, 9112C, and a non-base-side protruding member formed in the upper locking member 938. The 9384 passes through the second circular holes 9114A, 9114B, 9114C, so that the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are connected at the upper end. Similarly, the base end side projection member 9402 formed in the lower locking member 940 passes through each third circular hole 9116A, 9116B, 9116C, and the base end side projection formed in the lower locking member 940 is formed. The member 9404 passes through the fourth circular holes 9118A, 9118B, 9118C, so that the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are connected at the lower end. The three light guide plates 911 </ b> A, 911 </ b> B, and 911 </ b> C connected in this way are fixed to the light guide plate cover 936. When connecting the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, a decorative cover 942 that functions as a decorative plate of the right light effect unit 900R is also attached to the surface (player) side of the light guide plate 911.

  Note that the protruding members 9382, 9384, 9402, and 9404 have substantially the same length regardless of whether they are on the base end side or the non-base end side. Thus, by making the protruding members 9382, 9384, 9402, and 9404 penetrating the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C substantially the same, the distance between the light guide plates (the horizontal length to the opposing light guide plates) is increased. Regardless, it can be kept within a certain length range. However, the protruding members 9382, 9384, 9402, and 9404 do not necessarily have substantially the same length. For example, the length of the protruding member 9382 on the proximal end side and the length of the protruding member 9384 on the opposite proximal side are different. Alternatively, similarly, the length of the protruding member 9402 on the proximal end side may be different from the length of the protruding member 9404 on the opposite proximal side.

  The upper and lower ends of the light guide plate cover 936 are connected to the lens base 930 by cover mounting members 932 and 934 (for example, see FIG. 50), and the light guide plate 911 and the lens 928 are integrated to face the LED substrate 922. Be placed.

  By the way, if each side surface 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911 is perpendicular to each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911, the LED 921 and the light guide plate 911 arranged on the LED substrate 922 are used. A predetermined angle is generated between the base end side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1, and light from the LED 921 cannot sufficiently enter the light guide plate 911.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 on the base end side of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are cut so that a surface facing the LED 921 disposed on the LED substrate 922 is formed. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 921 is configured to be incident substantially perpendicular to the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 on the base end side.

  By the way, if the light incident on each of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C is diffused without going straight, there is a problem that the images that should appear on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 do not appear clearly. May occur. In this regard, in the present embodiment, each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 is cut so that a surface facing the LED 921 is formed. Thereby, the straightness of the light incident on the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C can be increased, and the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are inclined with respect to the LED substrate 922, and the light guide plates 911 are flat. It becomes possible to make an image appear clearly on the surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 and 57, on the side opposite to the LED substrate 922 side, an open region is formed between the lens 928 and the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C. 980 is formed. In this open area 980, various light effects can be performed.

  The inner walls (reflective members) 914L and 914R (for example, see FIGS. 45 and 46) of the side covers 903L and 903R of the front panel 500 are inclined in the same direction as the inclination direction of the light guide plate on the front side of the LED substrate 922. It is possible to function as a reflective surface that has been mirror-finished. That is, when the light emitted from the LED 921 disposed on the LED substrate 922 enters the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 of the light guide plate 911, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are applied in advance. An image such as a pattern or text appears. Thus, the images appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are reflected by the inner wall 914R functioning as a reflecting surface and reach the player's visual field. A part of the light emitted from the lens 928 is similarly reflected and reaches the player's visual field. In this case, the player visually recognizes the light emitted from the lens 928 and / or the image directly reflected on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 and the image reflected by the inner wall 914R. Combined with this, it is possible to make the effect that the light image is doubled.

  In addition, the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base side of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are not flat with respect to the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. The surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 are cut so that the angle between the front and back surfaces (the player side surface) is an acute angle (see, for example, FIG. 55). As described above, since the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 on the base end side are also cut, a cross section that can be seen when these light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are cut in the horizontal direction is as shown in FIG. 55, for example. Furthermore, of the front and back surfaces of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3, a trapezoid is formed with the back surface (surface on the lens 928 side) as the upper base and the front surface (player side surface) as the lower base.

  In this way, the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C on the opposite base side are between the front surfaces (the player side surfaces) of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3. By making the cut so that the angle formed by is an acute angle, the light emission from the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the opposite base end side of the light guide plate 911 can be made difficult to see from the player side (player) From the side, it can be recognized only as a line along the opposite end of each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911), and the player's consciousness is the flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. The image that appears can be watched. On the other hand, for a third party who is not a gaming party of the pachislot, the pachislot is expected to be in an advantageous state, for example, using light emitted from the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 of the light guide plate 911. It is possible to appeal that the state is high. In particular, when the plurality of light guide plates 911 are brought close to each other so that the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base end side are substantially flush with each other, the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C on the opposite base end side. Since the thickness of each of the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 is increased and thick light is emitted, it is possible to strongly appeal to the third party. In addition, since the light emitted from the lens 928 can be visually recognized in the open region 980, the effect is great. In particular, in a gaming machine in which an effect image is displayed by projecting image light projected from the projector 213, if the vicinity of the screen is brightened, the projected image becomes blurred, so the vicinity of the screen needs to be dark. In such a case, it is difficult to provide a light emitting means in the vicinity of the screen, and the appeal to third parties tends to be weakened, so the effect is remarkable.

  In addition, when a plurality of light guide plates are arranged in a stacked manner as in the present embodiment, the end portion of each light guide plate opposite to the base end side is cut at the same angle so that the end portion is visually recognized. Although it is preferable in that the appeal to a third party that can be strengthened, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the case where a light guide plate cut at one angle and a light guide plate cut at another angle are arranged in an overlapping manner, the person who is in a range where the end of the light guide plate cut at one angle can be visually recognized And it can appeal to both those who are in the range which can visually recognize the edge part of the light-guide plate cut at other angles, and the range which can appeal to a third party becomes wide.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base side of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are connected to the front surface (the player side) of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3. However, instead of this, it may be cut so as to be an obtuse angle. In this case, the light emission from the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base side of the light guide plate 911 can be viewed from the player side, and the images appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. Together with this, it becomes possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest of the player.

  In addition, the emission color of light emitted from the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base side of the light guide plate 911 can be arbitrarily determined, but if the emission color is a warm color or rainbow color, The player's interest can be further enhanced.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53, among the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, the third light guide plate 911C has the LEDs 921 arranged in the sixth row 923F on the side surface 911A1 on the base end side. A light guide protrusion 956 for receiving light from the light is provided. The protruding body 956 has a comb shape corresponding to the arrangement pitch of the LEDs in the sixth row 923F.

  As shown in FIG. 56, each of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C is housed in the light guide plate cover 936, and the LED board so that the protruding body 956 and the LED 921 disposed on the LED board 922 face each other. 922. The light guide plate cover 936 is provided with a partition wall 937 that partitions the protrusions 956, and the partition wall 937 prevents light emitted from the LEDs 921 facing the adjacent protrusions 956. It has a function. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light entering from the protrusions 956 of the third light guide plate 911 </ b> C from being mixed with each other between the plurality of LEDs 921. Furthermore, since the light guide plate projection 956 and the light guide plate 911C are integrally formed, the light incident area (for example, the light guide plate (for example, compared with a separate light guide plate such as a diffusion lens), for example, 54 can be reduced, and the effect area of the light guide plate 911C (for example, the area β shown in FIG. 54) can be increased accordingly.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 55, when the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are arranged in an overlapping manner, the space between one light guide plate and another adjacent light guide plate is set to the base end side (LED substrate). 922 side) and is gradually narrowed toward the opposite base end side (the side opposite to the LED substrate 922).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, the first circle on the surface (player side) of the front surface of the flat surface 911A3 of the first light guide plate 911A that faces the second light guide plate 911B (the player side). The first rib 9113A, the second rib 9115A, the peripheral edge of the opening 9112A, the peripheral edge of the second circular opening 9114A, the peripheral edge of the third circular opening 9116A, and the peripheral edge of the fourth circular opening 9118A, respectively. A third rib 9117A and a fourth rib 9119A are provided. Each of these ribs 9113A, 9115A, 9117A, and 9119A has an inclined surface that inclines downward from the base end side toward the opposite base end side (see, for example, FIG. 55).

  Similarly, on the surface opposite to the third light guide plate 911C (player side) of the front and back surfaces of the flat surface 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B, the peripheral portion of the first circular opening 9112B, the second circle A first rib 9113B, a second rib 9115B, a third rib 9117B, and a fourth rib 9119B are provided on the periphery of the opening 9114B, the periphery of the third circular opening 9116B, and the periphery of the fourth circular opening 9118B, respectively. Is provided. Each of these ribs 9113B, 9115B, 9117B, and 9119B has an inclined surface that inclines downward from the base end side toward the opposite base end side (see, for example, FIG. 55).

  When connecting the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C, the ribs 9113A, 9115A, 9117A, 9119A provided on the first light guide plate 911A are flat surfaces 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B facing each other. Abut. Similarly, the ribs 9113B, 9115B, 9117B, and 9119B provided on the second light guide plate 911B are in contact with the flat surface 911C3 of the third light guide plate 911C facing each other. In this way, when the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are connected to the flat surfaces of the light guide plates facing each other with the ribs in contact with each other and fixed to the light guide plate cover 936, the flat surfaces of the light guide plates are fixed to each other. The space is the widest on the base end side and gradually decreases toward the opposite base end side.

  In this manner, by making the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plate the widest on the base end side, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs 921 arranged in adjacent rows from entering. For example, the light emitted from the LEDs 921 arranged in the fourth row 923D enters the side surface 911A1 on the proximal end side of the first light guide plate 911A, and is arranged, for example, in the third row 923C or the fifth row 923E. Further, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED 921 from entering. In addition, by narrowing the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plate on the non-base end side, the light emitted from the side surface of the light guide plate can be thickened, and the appeal to third parties can be increased. it can. Furthermore, since the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are connected to the light guide plates facing each other with the ribs in contact with each other and then fixed to the light guide plate cover 936, the stability when transporting the pastillo is improved. The effect is also excellent.

  The space between one light guide plate and another adjacent light guide plate is widest on the base end side (LED substrate 922 side) and on the opposite base end side (opposite side of the LED substrate 922). The mode of gradually narrowing toward the base is not limited to the above mode in which a rib having an inclined surface that slopes downward from the base end side toward the non-base end side is provided. For example, a boss on the base end side and a boss on the non-base end side are provided on the flat surface 911A3 of the first light guide plate 911A on the side facing the second light guide plate 911B. The height of the boss on the end side (the shortest distance to the flat surface of the opposing second light guide plate 911B) may be increased. Similarly, a boss on the base end side and a boss on the non-base end side are provided on the flat surface 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B on the side facing the third light guide plate 911C, and more than the boss on the anti-base end side. You may make it the height of the boss | hub of the base end side become large. Of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, the flat surface of the first light guide plate 911A on the side facing the second light guide plate 911B is inclined downward from the base end side toward the opposite base end side. A rib having an inclined surface is provided, and the flat surface of the second light guide plate 911B on the side facing the third light guide plate 911C is smaller in height than the base end boss and the base end boss. A boss on the opposite base end side may be provided.

(2) Left Light Effect Unit The left light effect unit 900L will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 58 is a front view of the left-side light effect unit 900L, FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 58, and FIG. FIG.

  As described above, the configuration of the left light effect unit 900L is substantially the same as that of the right light effect unit 900R, and will be briefly described here.

  The left light effect unit 900L realizes a predetermined light effect together with the right light effect unit 900R on the left side when viewed from the front of the front panel 500 (for example, see FIG. 45), and an LED substrate 1922 on which a large number of LEDs are arranged. And a left lens subunit 912L in which a light emission effect is performed via the lens 1928, and a left light guide plate subunit 910L in which a light emission effect by a light guide plate 1911 described later is performed.

(2-1) LED board The LED board 1922 has a rectangular shape like the LED board 922, and the LEDs arranged on the LED board 1922 are arranged to face the front of the pachislot machine. That is, the LED substrate 1922 is disposed so that the surface on which the LEDs are disposed is along a two-dimensional surface including the left and right direction and the up and down direction in front view (facing in front view).

  The LED substrate 1922 is provided with a large number of LEDs arranged on the surface thereof for each system. The LED substrate 1922 is housed in an LED substrate cover (not shown) that covers the back side.

  The LED board 1922 has LED rows in which LEDs (not shown) are arranged in the vertical direction, like the LED board 922, but the number of rows is one less than the LED board 922. . This is because the number of light guide plates 1911 described later is one less.

  In addition, about the other structure of LED board 1922, it is substantially the same as LED board 922, and description is abbreviate | omitted.

(2-2) Left Lens Subunit The left lens subunit 912L includes three light guide lenses 1924 (left row light guide lens 1924A and middle row light guide lens 1924B) that conduct light from the LEDs arranged on the LED substrate 1922. , Right column light guide lens 1924C) and a light guide lens reflector 1926 that can accommodate each light guide lens 1924A, 1924B, 1924C so that light leakage through the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C is suppressed. A lens 1928 in which three lenses 1928A, 1928B, and 1928C having a substantially semicircular cross section and a hollow cylinder are adjacently arranged side by side and integrated in a stepwise manner, and a lens base 1930 that inserts and supports them. .

  All of the three light guide lenses 1924 are arranged so as to face the LEDs arranged in the LED row of the LED substrate 1922.

  Each column light guide lens 1924A, 1924B, 1924C is formed with a plurality of columnar small columns (not shown) extending toward the LED substrate 1922 along the longitudinal direction. Here, since the lens 1928 is composed of three lenses 1928A, 1928B, and 1928C that are adjacently arranged in a staircase shape, the shortest length from each small column to the LED substrate 1922 (the length in the horizontal direction). Hereinafter, it is simply referred to as “length”) depending on each lens 1928. Note that these small pillars can guide the light from the LED 1921 to the respective small pillars up to the back of each lens 1928.

  The light from the LEDs arranged on the LED substrate 1922 is conducted through the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C and emitted from the lenses 1928A, 1928B, 1928C, so the left column lens 1928A is farthest from the LED substrate 1922. The right row lens 1928C emits light at a position closest to the LED substrate 1922 (the rearmost position), and the middle row lens 1928B emits light at an intermediate position. .

  As with the right lens subunit 912R, the light emitted from the LEDs disposed on the LED substrate 1922 is transmitted to the respective lenses 1928A, 1928B, and 1928C while suppressing light attenuation by the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, and 1924C. By guiding to the vicinity of the back surface, the light emission intensity is not lowered even if the light emission position of the lens 1928 is away from the LED substrate. As a result, it is possible to emit light with substantially uniform emission intensity at a position where the length from the LED substrate 1922 is different, although the light source is a single LED substrate.

  The light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, and 1924C are also accommodated in the light guide lens reflector 1926.

  The lens base 1930 is fixed so that the lens 1928 covers the light guide lens reflector 1926. The lens base 1930 has the end faces of the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, and 1924C in the vicinity of the back surfaces of the lenses 1928A, 1928B, and 1928C, with the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, and 1924C facing the LED substrate 1922. I am doing so. Each lens 1928A, 1928B, 1928C is engraved with a pattern as if multiple sine waves overlapped, and when the LED emits light, the pattern according to the emission color can be seen through the light guide plate 1911. it can.

(2-3) Left Light Guide Plate Subunit The left light guide plate subunit 910L includes a plurality of light guide plates 1911A and 1911B stacked on each other. The left light guide plate subunit 910L has the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B when viewed from the front of the pachislot with the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B facing the LED substrate 1922, respectively. The flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the respective light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are spread from the rear to the front toward the outside of the pachislot (on the left side in the front view) so that the lens 1928 and the lens 1928 overlap. It is inclined.

  Thus, by inclining each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 with respect to the LED substrate 1922, the light guide plate 1911 and the lens 1928 use the same LED substrate 1922 as a light source, while the light guide plate 1911 The lens 1928 can be visually recognized through the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3, and a mixed effect of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B and the lens 1928 is provided.

  The flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are also inclined with respect to the LED substrate 1922. However, when the light source is not an LED but a light source that diffuses light compared to an LED, such as a lamp. The flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3, and 1911C3 of the light guide plate 1911 are preferably inclined with respect to a virtual two-dimensional surface where the light of each lamp is most concentrated in a plurality of lamps. In addition, even if the light source is an LED, if the LEDs are inclined with respect to the LED substrate, the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are not inclined with respect to the LED substrate. Instead, it is preferable that the plurality of LEDs are inclined with respect to a virtual two-dimensional plane on which the light of each LED is most concentrated. However, although the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LEDs, the light taken in (entered) from the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side Is substantially parallel to the traveling direction.

  In addition, the light guide plate 1911 forms irregularities in a predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. on each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3, and transmits light from the end along the surface, for example, when the LED is lit, A predetermined engraved shape, pattern, character, or the like appears on each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3. In the present embodiment, a non-permeable process is performed in which a specific part of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 is vapor-deposited, for example, by hot stamping. . Thereby, when the LEDs disposed opposite to the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 1911 are turned on, the non-transparent region where the hot stamping foil is present is three-dimensional by the surrounding light transmission region, and An aspect that stands out can be created.

  In addition, “when the LED is turned on, a predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. engraved on each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3, 1911C3” means that each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3 is normal (for example, when the LED is turned off). Nothing appears, and the present invention is not limited to a mode in which a predetermined shape, pattern, character, or the like appears on each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3 at a specific time (for example, when an LED is lit). For example, even when it is normal, the engraved predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. can be visually recognized by the incident light of disturbance light, and at the specified time, the engraved predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. are clearer A mode in which the user can visually recognize the image is also included.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined shape, pattern, character, or the like is engraved on each light guide plate 1911. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an image is usually formed by using a transparent paint or a transparent member. Although the time is substantially invisible, the image may be visible at a specific time.

  Further, the shape, pattern, characters, etc. formed on the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are different from the shape, pattern, characters, etc. formed on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. Therefore, when the LED is turned on, different images appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are the same motif as the images appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3 and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911.

  However, the images appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 when the LED is lit may be the same as the images appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3 and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a specific portion of each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 and the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 is formed by a non-transparent material (for example, silver color) by hot stamping, for example. However, it is not always necessary to perform the non-permeable treatment on the flat surfaces of all the light guide plates, and only the flat surfaces of some of the light guide plates are non-permeable. Transparency processing may be performed.

  The light guide plate cover 1936 accommodates two light guide plates 1911 </ b> A and 1911 </ b> B, and the side surfaces 1911 </ b> A <b> 1 and 1911 </ b> B <b> 1 of each light guide plate 1911 are opposed to the LED substrate 1922. In addition, the plurality of light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are inclined so as to be separated from the LED substrate 1922 from the base end side to the opposite base end side of the respective light guide plates 1911A and 1911B while overlapping each other. When the LEDs arranged in the LED are turned on, the patterns appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the respective light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are visually recognized with a parallax (shift) from the player's viewpoint, and a stereoscopic effect is produced. It becomes possible.

  Further, the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are circular on the upper end side and the base end side, the upper end side and the anti-base end side, the lower end side and the base end side, the lower end and the anti-base end side, respectively. Openings 19112A, 19114A, 19116A, 19118A, 19112B, 19114B, 19116B, 19118B are formed.

  Then, a plurality of projecting members (not shown) formed on the upper locking member 1938 pass through the circular holes on the upper end side, so that the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are connected at the upper end. Similarly, a plurality of projecting members (not shown) formed on the lower upper locking member 1940 pass through the circular holes on the lower end side, thereby connecting the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B at the lower end. The two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B connected in this way are fixed to the light guide plate cover 1936. When connecting the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B, a decorative cover 1942 that functions as a decorative plate of the left light effect unit 900L is also attached to the surface (player) side of the light guide plate 1911.

  In addition, the protrusion member which penetrates each circular aperture of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B has substantially the same length regardless of whether it is the base end side or the non-base end side. In this way, by making the protruding members penetrating the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B substantially the same, it is in a range of a constant length regardless of the distance between the light guide plates (the horizontal length to the opposing light guide plates). Can be suppressed.

  The light guide plate cover 1936 is connected to the lens base 1930 at the upper and lower ends thereof by a cover mounting member (not shown), and the light guide plate 1911 and the lens 1928 are integrally disposed so as to face the LED substrate 1922.

  Further, each of the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B on the base end side of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B is also cut so that a surface facing the LED arranged on the LED substrate 1922 is formed, and thereby light is emitted from the LED. The incident light is incident substantially perpendicularly to the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side, so that the light is sufficiently incident.

  Here, similarly to the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are cut so that the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 face the LEDs. Accordingly, the straightness of the light incident on the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B can be increased, and the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are inclined while the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are inclined with respect to the LED substrate 1922. It is possible to make the image appear clearly on the screen.

  In addition, an open region 1980 is formed between the lens 1928 and the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B on the side opposite to the LED substrate 1922 side. In the open area 1980, various light effects can be performed.

  As described above, the inner walls (reflecting members) 914L and 914R (for example, see FIGS. 45 and 46) of the side covers 903L and 903R of the front panel 500 are arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 1922 and the inclination direction of the light guide plate. Inclined in the same direction. When light emitted from the LEDs arranged on the LED substrate 1922 enters the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 of the light guide plate 1911, patterns and characters previously applied to the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 and 1911C3 of the light guide plate 1911 are displayed. An image such as appears. The images appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 as described above are reflected by the inner wall 914L functioning as a reflecting surface and reach the player's visual field. A part of the light emitted from the lens 1928 is similarly reflected and reaches the player's visual field. In this case, the player can directly view the light emitted from the lens 1928 and / or the image displayed on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 and the image reflected by the inner wall 914L. In combination with the above, it is possible to make the consciousness of the effect that the light image is doubled.

  Further, the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the opposite base end sides of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are not perpendicular to the respective flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911, but are arranged in a table of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3. The back surface is cut so that the angle formed with the front surface (player side surface) is an acute angle (see, for example, FIG. 59). As described above, since the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side are also cut, the cross section seen when these light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are cut in the horizontal direction is a flat surface as shown in FIG. 59, for example. Of the front and back surfaces of 1911A3 and 1911B3, a trapezoid is formed with the back surface (the surface on the lens 1928 side) as the upper base and the front surface (the player-side surface) as the lower bottom.

  In this way, the angle formed between the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B on the opposite base side and the front surface (the player side surface) of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 is an acute angle. By cutting so that the light emission from the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the opposite base end side of the light guide plate 1911 is difficult to see from the player side (from the player side each of the light guide plate 1911 It is possible to recognize the player's consciousness on the images appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 only as a linear shape along the opposite end of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3. On the other hand, for a third party who is not a gaming party of the pachislot, using the light emitted from the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 of the light guide plate 1911, the pachislot is in an advantageous state or expected It becomes possible to appeal that it is in a high state. In particular, when the plurality of light guide plates 1911 are brought close to each other so that the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the opposite base side are substantially flush, the side surfaces 1911A2 on the opposite base side of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B. Since the thickness of 1911B2 is increased and thick light is emitted, it can be strongly appealed to the third party. Further, since the light emission from the lens 1928 can be visually recognized in the open area 1980, the effect is great. Further, in combination with light emitted from the side surfaces 911A2 and 911B2 of the light guide plate 911, it is possible to appeal over a wide range. In particular, in a gaming machine in which an effect image is displayed by projecting video light projected from the projector 213, since the appeal power to a third party tends to be weak, the effect is remarkable.

  In the present embodiment, the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the opposite base end sides of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are placed between the front surface and the back surface (the player side surface) of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3. Although the cut is made so that the angle formed is an acute angle, it may be cut so as to be an obtuse angle instead. In this case, the light emission from the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the opposite base end side of the light guide plate 1911 can be visually recognized from the player side, and is combined with images displayed on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest of the player.

  Further, the emission color of light emitted from the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the side opposite to the base end of the light guide plate 1911 can be arbitrarily determined. However, if the emission color is a warm color or rainbow color, the game is further played. Can enhance the interest of the person. Further, the emission color of light emitted from the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base side of the light guide plate 911 and the emission color of light emitted from the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the opposite base side of the light guide plate 1911. If, for example, is changed according to the gaming state, various effects can be performed.

  As for the left light guide plate subunit 910L, the side surface 911A1 on the base end side of the third light guide plate 911C has a comb shape corresponding to the arrangement pitch of the LEDs. It does not have the light guide plate made into the comb-tooth shape corresponding to the arrangement pitch. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the right light guide plate subunit 910R may have a comb-shaped light guide plate corresponding to the arrangement pitch of the LEDs.

  Further, when the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are arranged in an overlapping manner, the space between one light guide plate and another adjacent light guide plate is widest on the base end side and gradually toward the opposite base end side. To be narrower. In this method, a rib having an inclined surface that inclines downward from the proximal end side toward the opposite proximal end side may be formed between the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B. However, bosses having different heights on the base end side and the opposite base end side may be formed between the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B.

  In this way, by making the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plate the widest on the base end side, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs arranged in adjacent rows from entering. In addition, by narrowing the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plate on the non-base end side, the light emitted from the side surface of the light guide plate can be thickened, and the appeal to third parties can be increased. it can. Furthermore, since the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are connected to the light guide plates facing each other by forming ribs and bosses and then fixed to the light guide plate cover 1936, the stability when transporting the pastillo is also improved. Demonstrate the effect of excellent.

(3) Aspect of the light effect of the light effect unit Next, the light effect effect of the light effect unit will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, of the right light effect unit 900R and the left light effect unit 900L, the right light effect unit 900R will be described as an example.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an aspect of the right light effect unit 900 when neither the right light guide plate subunit 910R nor the right lens subunit 912R is emitting light. In this case, no pattern appears on each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 in any of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C (see, for example, FIG. 53). Therefore, the right lens subunit 912R behind can be visually recognized through the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C.

  However, all or at least one of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C is subjected to an impermeable process. In this non-transparent treatment, alphabetic characters / patterns 915 are applied on the upper and lower portions of each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. The portion that has been subjected to the impermeable treatment in this way can be visually recognized regardless of whether or not the light emission effect is being performed because, for example, a silver metal color foil is deposited. Here, a pattern or the like is not visually recognized in the light transmissive region, but the characters and patterns 915 in the upper and lower non-transmissive regions can be visually recognized. For this reason, since the surrounding light transmission region is transparent, the characters / patterns 915 in the non-transparent region appear three-dimensionally and stand out. For this reason, even if neither the right light guide plate subunit 910R nor the right lens subunit 912R has a light emitting effect, a video visual effect can be provided.

  In FIG. 62, when the LEDs 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 are partially lit, a light emission effect is performed for the right light guide plate subunit 910R and a light emission effect is not performed for the right lens subunit 912R. It is a figure which shows the aspect of right light effect unit 900R. In this case, a pattern related to the pachislot motif appears on each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C.

  Here, the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are inclined so as to be separated from the LED substrate 922 from the base end side to the non-base end side of each light guide plate 911A, 911B, 911C while overlapping each other. Therefore, the patterns appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C can be visually recognized with parallax, and a three-dimensional image appears to appear. In FIG. 62, since a triangular pattern 916 is applied to each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3, it is difficult to grasp on the drawing, but the patterns applied to the respective flat surface carrier surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3. 916 is visually recognized with parallax and can feel a three-dimensional effect. In this way, it is possible to produce an effect with a high visual effect, and to enhance the game entertainment.

  FIG. 63 shows that when the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 is partially lit, the light guide effect is not performed for the right light guide plate subunit 910R and the light effect is performed for the right lens subunit 912R. It is a figure which shows the aspect of right light effect unit 900R. In this case, in any of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, the light transmission area of each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 includes any pattern including a triangular pattern 916 (for example, see FIG. 62). Has not appeared. Therefore, the light emission mode of the right lens subunit 912R behind can be visually recognized through the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C.

  However, although a pattern or the like is not visually recognized in the light transmission region of each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, the characters and patterns 915 in the upper and lower non-transparent regions are visually recognized. can do. At this time, since the light transmission area around the area is transparent, the characters / patterns 915 in the non-transmission area appear three-dimensionally and stand out. In particular, since the light emission effect is performed on the right lens subunit 912R, the characters / patterns 915 in the non-transmissive region can be more visually recognized. In this way, it is possible to produce an effect with a high visual effect, and to enhance the game entertainment.

  Next, processing executed by the pachislot sub-control circuit 150 (see FIG. 18) according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main board communication task]
In the pachislot of this embodiment, the main control circuit 90 transmits command data (data of various control commands related to effects based on the progress of the game and the player's operation) to the sub-control circuit 150. The sub control circuit 150 receives command data transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub-control circuit 150 determines an effect corresponding to the type of the command data based on the received command data, and displays the display device 120 shown in FIG. 19 (the projector 213 shown in FIG. 15 and the movable shown in FIG. 20). The screen unit 700), the LED 921 (see FIG. 50), the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 15), the speaker group 84, and the LED group 85 are driven to perform effect control. That is, the sub-control circuit 150 has an information receiving means that can receive a command transmitted from the main control circuit 90 and execute control related to effects based on the received command.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, the main board communication task executed by the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) shown in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of the main board communication task in this embodiment. FIG. 65 shows an example of a command format (arrangement of command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90. As shown in FIG.

  The main board communication task is a task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 90 (see FIG. 16). The main board communication task monitors the reception of command data at a cycle of 10 msec so that the sub CPU 151 receives the command transmitted by the main control circuit 90.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65, the command format is composed of 8-byte data. In the command format shown in FIG. 65, the 1st byte indicates the command type, the 2nd to 7th bytes indicate data corresponding to the command type, and the 8th byte indicates sum data (whether or not the data is correctly transmitted). (Error detection code for checking).

  Referring to FIG. 64, first, the sub CPU 151 initializes a communication message queue transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) (S1). Next, the sub CPU 151 obtains a reception command from the communication message queue (S2). Next, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not there is a command in the communication message queue (S3). When it is determined in S3 that there is no command in the communication message queue (when S3 is NO), the sub CPU 151 returns to S2 to perform processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S3 that there is a command in the communication message queue (when S3 is YES), the sub CPU 151 checks the received command (S4).

  Next, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the received command is a valid command (S5). Note that “the received command is valid” means that, for example, in the command format shown in FIG. 65, the command type (D1) and the value of SUM (D8) are normal values. . When it is determined in S5 that the received command is not a valid command (when S5 is NO), the sub CPU 151 returns to S2 to perform processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S5 that the received command is a valid command (S5 is YES), the sub CPU 151 performs a command analysis process (S6). Details of the command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 described later.

[Command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the command analysis processing performed in S6 during the main board communication task (see FIG. 64) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of command analysis processing in this embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 151 performs effect content determination processing (S110). Details of the effect content determination process will be described later.

  Next, when the production content is determined in the production content determination process (S110), the sub CPU 151 determines the content of the animation displayed on the sub display device 18 based on the decided production content. Data determination processing is performed (S120).

  Next, when the content of the effect is determined in the effect content determination process (S110), the sub CPU 151 determines lamp data for determining lighting patterns such as turning on and off of the lamp group 21 and brightness based on the determined effect content. A determination process is performed (S130).

  Next, when the production content is determined in the production content determination process (S110), the sub CPU 151 determines the BGM output from the speaker group 84 and the content of the sound effect based on the decided production content. Data determination processing is performed (S140).

  Next, when the content of the effect is determined in the effect content determination process (S110), the sub CPU 151 performs a screen accessory data determination process for determining the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 based on the determined effect content. Perform (S150).

  Next, when each determined data exists, the sub CPU 151 registers each data in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 152 (S160). Thereafter, the sub CPU 151 ends the command analysis process.

[Production content decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the effect content determination process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of effect content determination processing in the present embodiment. The effect content determination process is a process performed in S110 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 66). In the effect content determination process, the effect content is determined in accordance with the type of command received by the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) (the value of D1 shown in FIG. 65).

  First, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a medal insertion command has been received (S21). When the sub CPU 151 determines that the medal insertion command is not received in S21 (when S21 is NO), the sub CPU 151 proceeds to S23.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S21 that a medal insertion command has been received (when S21 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 determines the contents of the effect according to the parameters included in the medal insertion command when receiving the medal insertion command. (S22), and then the effect content determination process is terminated.

  In S23, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a start command has been received. When it is determined in S23 that a start command has been received, the sub CPU 151 performs a start command reception process (S24). In the process at the time of receiving the start command, a random number for production is extracted, and the production number is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination or the like and registered. The production number is data for designating production contents.

  In S23, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a start command indicating that the start lever 16 has been operated is received. When it is determined in S23 that the start command has not been received (when S23 is NO), the sub CPU 151 proceeds to S25 and performs processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S23 that a start command has been received (when S23 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 performs a start command reception process (S24), and then ends the effect content determination process.

  In S25, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a reel rotation start command indicating that rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has started has been received. When it is determined in S25 that the reel rotation start command has not been received (when S25 is NO), the sub CPU 151 proceeds to S27 and performs processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S25 that the reel rotation start command has been received (when S25 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the reel rotation start command. A command reception process is performed (S26), and then the effect content determination process is terminated.

  In S27, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a reel stop command is received indicating that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has been stopped. When it is determined in S27 that the reel stop command has not been received (when S27 is NO), the sub CPU 151 proceeds to S29 and performs processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S27 that the reel stop command has been received (when S27 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 receives the reel stop command that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the reel stop command. The process is performed, and then the effect content determination process ends.

  In S29, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a winning action command has been received. If it is determined in S29 that no winning operation command has been received (if S29 is NO), the sub CPU 151 proceeds to S31.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that a winning action command has been received (when S29 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 receives a winning action command that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the winning action command. The process is performed, and then the effect content determination process ends.

  In S31, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a bonus end command indicating that the bonus game has ended is received. If it is determined in S31 that a bonus end command has not been received (if S31 is NO), the sub CPU 151 proceeds to S33 and performs processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S31 that a bonus end command has been received (when S31 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 receives a bonus end command for determining the effect content according to the parameter included in the bonus end command. A process is performed (S32), and the effect content determination process is then terminated.

  In S33, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a bonus start command indicating that the bonus game has started has been received. When the sub CPU 151 determines in S33 that the bonus start command has not been received (when S33 is NO), the sub CPU 151 proceeds to S35 and performs processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S33 that a bonus start command has been received (when S33 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 receives a bonus start command for determining the effect content according to the parameter included in the bonus start command. A process is performed (S34), and the effect content determination process is then terminated.

  In S35, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not it has received a lock start command (that is, invalidation period start command (hereinafter the same)) indicating that a lock effect (that is, invalidation period (hereinafter the same)) has started. Determine. When it is determined in S35 that the lock start command has not been received (when S35 is NO), the sub CPU 151 proceeds to S37 and performs processing. That is, the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 150 includes a lock start command (lock effect start information) indicating that the lock effect has been started. The lock effect will be described in a focus change process described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the lock start command has been received (when S35 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 receives the lock start command that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the lock start command. A process is performed (S36), and the effect content determination process is then terminated.

  In S37, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not a lock end command indicating that the lock effect has ended is received. When the sub CPU 151 determines in S37 that the lock end command has not been received (when S37 is NO), the sub CPU 151 ends the effect content determination process. That is, the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 150 includes a lock end command (lock effect end information) that can determine whether or not the lock effect has ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S37 that the lock end command has been received (when S37 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 receives the lock end command that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the lock end command. A process is performed (S38), and the effect content determination process is then terminated.

  It should be noted that any one of the second to seventh bytes of the start command is added including the type of lock effect and a notification game state (for example, an ART game state) in which notification navigation is generated. The main CPU 101 determines the type of lock effect added to the second to seventh bytes of the start command and the notification game state (for example, the ART game state) and the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means and a plurality of RT states. By drawing (or determining) based on (a plurality of replay winning probabilities are different), game states having different degrees of advantage such as a general gaming state, a bonus gaming state, and an ART gaming state are determined. That is, the main CPU 101 in this embodiment constitutes a gaming state changing unit that determines a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage and changes the gaming state.

  The transmission timing of each command transmitted from the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) to the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) is as follows. The medal insertion command is a timing when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 14, or a timing when the MAX bet button 15a or the 1 bet button 15b is pressed. The start command is a timing at which the main CPU 101 performs various lottery processes when the start lever 16 is pressed. The reel rotation start command is a timing at which the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start to rotate. The reel stop command is a timing at which one of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is pressed, and one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped. The winning operation command is the timing at which the combination of the symbols of the reels, where all the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped and stopped on the effective line, is determined. The bonus end command is a timing at which the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus game has ended. The bonus start command is a timing at which the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus game has started (when the bonus symbols are aligned on the active line). The lock start command is a timing at which the main CPU 101 starts executing the lock effect after the start lever is pressed or after all the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped. The lock end command is a timing at which the main CPU 101 ends the execution of the lock effect after the start lever is pressed or after all the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

  In addition, data such as the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means and the type of lock effect are added to the second to seventh bytes of the start command, and transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 151.

[Screen character control task]
With reference to FIGS. 68 to 71, a screen accessory control task executed by the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) will be described. The screen accessory control task is a task for controlling the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 (see, for example, FIG. 21). FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the screen accessory control task in this embodiment. 69 to 71 are diagrams illustrating an example of a motor sequence table including control signal data of a motor 812 (see FIG. 33) that rotates the movable screen unit 700 (column body screen 710). These motor sequence tables also include data on which of the plurality of projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167 is stopped at the projection plane origin position. 69 to 71 are continuous in the order of FIGS. The motor sequence table is stored on the ROM cartridge substrate 86 (for example, see FIG. 18).

  That is, the motor sequence table shown in FIGS. 69 to 71 constitutes drive data, and the ROM cartridge substrate 86 that stores this motor sequence table constitutes drive data storage means.

  In this specification, a position serving as a reference for the projection plane when image light is projected from the projector 213 onto the projection plane of the movable screen unit 700 is referred to as a “projection plane origin position”. For example, in FIG. 38, the projection plane 7123 of the first screen member 712 is stopped at the “projection plane origin position”.

  Further, in this specification, a position facing the stopper 794 (for example, see FIG. 38), that is, a plurality of grooves 7444 (for example, see FIG. 39) of the gear-shaped portion 744 (for example, see FIG. 38). Among these, the position of the groove 7444 that engages with the stopper pin 7944 when the stopper 794 operates downward is referred to as a “groove origin position”.

  Further, in this specification, when the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 is stopped at the projection plane origin position, the groove at the groove origin position is referred to as a “first projection plane reference groove”. Similarly, the groove at the groove origin position when the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 is stopped at the projection plane origin position is referred to as a “second projection plane reference groove”, and the third screen member 716 A groove at the groove origin position when the projection plane 7167 is stopped at the projection plane origin position is referred to as a “third projection plane reference groove”.

  Next, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20 shown in FIGS. 69 to 71 will be described. The sub CPU 151 controls the rotation operation of the motor 812 (see, for example, FIG. 33) based on any one of the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20.

  The motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20 have different operation modes from the start to the stop of the movable screen unit 700 for each table. In addition, the motor control data of the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20 includes information on which projection plane among the plurality of projection planes 7123, 7141, and 7167 is stopped at the projection plane origin position. 69 to 71 illustrate motor sequence tables MT01 to MT06, MT15, and MT20, and the other motor sequence tables MT6 to MT14 and MT16 to MT19 are not shown.

  Here, each of the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20 will be briefly described. Of the projection planes 7123, 7141, and 7167 described above, the projection plane that is stopped at the projection plane origin position differs depending on the gaming state. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 151 stops the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection plane 7123 stops at the projection plane origin position in the general gaming state, and the projection plane 7141 stops at the projection plane origin position in the ART gaming state. Thus, in the specialization zone, the projection plane 7167 is controlled to stop at the projection plane origin position.

  In the present embodiment, the projection plane stopped at the projection plane origin position is made different depending on the gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the projection plane 7141 is set regardless of the general gaming state. The player may be given a sense of expectation by stopping at the projection plane origin position. In addition, for example, when the gaming state (for example, the chance state) in which the degree of advantage is difficult to grasp from the appearance (for example, from the player), any one of the projection surface 7123 and the projection surface 7141 is selected depending on the situation. You may make it stop at an origin position.

  The motor sequence tables MT01 to MT06 are tables used when, for example, the game state is changed, and the projection surface corresponding to the game state among the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 is stopped at the projection plane origin position. FIG. 6 is a motor sequence table for rotating the movable screen unit 700 so as to rotate. Of these, the motor sequence table MT01 particularly constitutes second drive data. The motor sequence table MT15 performs a rotation operation (hereinafter referred to as “turning effect”) that alternately repeats forward rotation and reverse rotation of the movable screen unit 700, and then rotates the movable screen unit 700 in the forward direction to perform projection. This is a motor sequence table for stopping any one of the surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167 at the projection plane origin position, and constitutes specific drive data or first drive data. In the motor sequence table MT20, when a cancel request (details will be described in “screen accessory sequence processing” described later) is generated, the moving screen unit 700 is performing a turning effect (step number 1 to step number 51). In addition, this is a motor sequence table dedicated to the generation of a cancel request and used only for stopping the projection plane 7123 at the projection plane origin position, and constitutes dedicated drive data or third drive data.

  Note that the above-mentioned roaring effect is an operation effect that repeatedly drives a movable member (for example, the columnar screen 710) in one direction and the other direction. It is not limited. For example, a longer time than the control (for example, control based on the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT03) in which the movable member is rotated in order to simply change the projection plane stopped at the projection plane origin position to another projection plane. As long as it is an operation effect that is rotated over or in a special manner (for example, irregular rotation), the manner is not limited.

  The motor sequence table MT01 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 69 and 75. FIG. 75 shows the timing of ON (excitation state) and OFF (non-excitation state) of control signals (A phase, B phase, -A phase, -B phase) of the motor 812 in the motor sequence table MT01, and will be described later. Relationship between solenoid 792 on (excited state) and off (non-excited state) timing for controlling the vertical movement of stopper pin 7944 of solenoid 792 in solenoid sequence table ST01 to prevent rotation of movable screen unit 700 It is a timing chart which shows. In this specification, for the sake of convenience, the opposite phases of the A phase and the B phase shown in FIG. 75 are referred to as a -A phase and a -B phase, respectively.

  The motor sequence table MT01 accelerates the movable screen unit 700 in the positive direction, and after the acceleration is finished, the light sensor 792 (for example, FIG. Is a table that controls the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection plane 7123 stops at the projection plane origin position. In this specification, the clockwise direction in FIG. 38 is referred to as “forward rotation”.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the motor sequence table MT01 includes pulse control of step number 1 to step number 13. In the motor sequence table MT01, the pulse width, the number of pulses, and the motor control state of the control signal (pulse signal) for controlling the motor (stepping motor) 812 are set for each step (also for other motor sequence tables). The same). One pulse of the control signal has a half-pulse width on section and a half-pulse width off section, and the “pulse width” in FIGS. 69 to 71 is a half-pulse time (unit: ms). The step number “−1” indicates the end of control based on the motor sequence table MT01. The motor control “Hold” indicates that the rotation of the motor 821 is stopped by excitation, the motor control “+” indicates that the motor 821 is rotated in the positive direction, and the motor control “−” indicates It shows that the motor 821 is rotated in the reverse direction. In the hold state (step number 1 and step number 13), which will be described later, the section is continuously on.

  In the motor sequence table MT01, as shown in FIG. 75, in step number 1, the phase A and phase B of the motor 812 (two-phase excitation motor) are on (excited). In addition, the phase of the -A phase and the phase of the -B phase are matched in the off state (de-energized state) (in the same phase), and the rotation of the motor 812 is stopped. .

  Next, although not shown in FIG. 75, in Step No. 2 to Step No. 6 of the motor sequence table MT01, the B phase, the -A phase, and the -B phase are respectively set to the A phase. While delaying 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees, the pulse width is gradually reduced at each step to accelerate the rotation of the motor 812 in the positive direction. The step (step number 1 to step number 6) of accelerating the motor 812 (that is, the columnar screen 710) in the stop state constitutes acceleration data.

  In step number 7 of the motor sequence table MT01, the light shielding piece 791 (the motor 812 (movable screen unit 700) is rotated at a constant speed until the position is detected by the optical sensor 802 (however, up to 432 pulses) is accelerated. Step number 7 for rotating the motor 812 (that is, the column screen 710) at regular intervals constitutes steady data.

  When a light shielding piece 791 (for example, see FIG. 24) is detected by the optical sensor 802 in step number 7 of the motor sequence table MT01, the process proceeds to step number 8 and later. In step number 8 to step number 12, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step, and the rotation of the motor 812 is decelerated. Step number 8 to step number 12 for decelerating after the motor 812 (that is, the columnar screen 710) is rotated regularly constitutes deceleration data.

  The combination of the pulse width and the pulse number corresponding to the step number is not limited to the motor sequence table MT01, and the acceleration data, the steady data, and the deceleration data are configured in the other motor sequence tables MT02 to MT20. Is the same. That is, no matter which motor sequence table is selected, acceleration data is formed if the drive data has a pulse width that is gradually shortened, and step numbers (in the case of the motor sequence table MT02, step numbers that have the same pulse width) 7. If the motor sequence table MT15 is step number 58 or the like), it constitutes steady data, and if it is drive data whose pulse width gradually increases, it constitutes deceleration data.

  By the way, in step number 7 of the motor sequence table MT01, the detection signals of the optical sensor 804 and the optical sensor 806 are not output. Therefore, even if a light shielding piece 791 (see, for example, FIG. 24) passes through the optical sensor 804 or the optical sensor 806, the light shielding piece 791 is not detected by the optical sensor 804 or the optical sensor 806. However, the detection signal of the optical sensor 804 or the optical sensor 806 is output instead of the detection signal of the optical sensor 804 or the optical sensor 806, but the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 804 or the optical sensor 806. Even if this is ignored, the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 may be continued until the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802. Also for other motor sequence tables, a motor sequence table (for example, a motor sequence) in which the rotation of the motor 812 is continued until the light shielding piece 791 is detected by a specific optical sensor at the step number for rotating the movable screen unit 700 at a constant speed. As long as the table MT20), the same processing as described above is performed. However, for example, such a process is not performed in the motor sequence table MT15, and the light shielding piece 791 is detected by any of the optical sensors 802, 804, 806 in the step number (step number 58) for rotating the movable screen unit 700 at a constant speed. Even in such a case, the rotation operation of the motor 812 ends.

  As described above, the sub CPU 151 executes control based on the motor sequence table corresponding to the projection plane to be stopped at the projection plane origin position and the mode of rotation of the movable screen unit 700 (effect 1 to effect 20). Thus, the projection plane can be surely stopped at the projection plane origin position without performing a positional shift while performing a predetermined performance operation.

  Next, in step number 13 of the motor sequence table MT01, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase of the motor 812 are matched in the off state (de-energized state) (set to the same phase), and the -A phase And the phase of -B phase are matched in the on state (excited state) (set to the same phase), and the rotation of the motor 812 is stopped. Step number 13 for stopping the motor 812 for a certain period of time after the motor 812 (that is, the column screen 710) has been decelerated constitutes retained data.

  As described above, in the motor sequence table MT01, the movable screen unit 700 is rotated forward by the series of controls described above, and the movable screen unit 700 is reached at the timing when the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 arrives at the projection plane origin position. 700 can be stopped.

  Note that the holding data is configured by the combination of the pulse width and the pulse number corresponding to the step number is not limited to the motor sequence table MT01, and the same applies to the other motor sequence tables MT02 to MT20. That is, regardless of which motor sequence table is selected, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase of the motor 812 are matched in the off state (de-energized state) (same phase), and the -A phase When the phase and the phase of -B phase are matched in the on state (excited state) (when the phase is the same), the retained data is configured.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 to 71, in step number 1, the motor 812 is held (maintains the stopped state) for 300 (ms). The period 300 (ms) is derived by pulse width × 2 × number of pulses, specifically, 10 (ms) × 2 × 15 = 300 (ms). In Step No. 7, the control signal is repeatedly turned on and off for a maximum of 432 pulses until the optical sensor 802 is detected. In Step No. 13, the motor 812 is held for 600 (ms). The period 600 (ms) is derived by 10 (ms) × 2 × 300 = 600 (ms).

  In order to place the motor 812 in the hold state, the A phase and the B phase are turned on, the -A phase and the -B phase are turned off, the A phase and the B phase are turned off, and -A Phase and -B phase may be turned on, phase A and -A phase may be turned on, phase B and -B may be turned off, or phase A, phase B, phase -A, And all four phases of -B phase are good also as an ON state. The same applies to other motor sequence tables.

  Note that the maximum pulse number 432 (Max432) in step number 7 is the number of pulses required for the movable screen unit 700 to make approximately one rotation. Therefore, if the optical sensor 802 is not detected before the number of pulses reaches 432 in step number 7, an abnormality has occurred in the gear group such as the optical sensor 802, the motor 812, the speed reduction mechanism 818, and the intermediate gear 820. Therefore, the sub CPU 151 performs error processing. As this error processing, for example, the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 is ended and the solenoid 792 is controlled to be in a non-excited state, and an error message is displayed on the sub display device 18 (see, for example, FIG. 1) or the like. A process of outputting a warning sound from 65L and 65R (for example, see FIG. 4) is performed. Error processing similar to the above is performed for other motor sequence tables.

  That is, the sub CPU 151 according to the present embodiment includes an abnormality processing unit that performs error processing (processing when an abnormality occurs) when the light shielding piece 791 is not detected for a predetermined time or more by the optical sensor while the column body screen 710 is rotating. Configure.

  Next, the motor sequence tables MT02 to MT06 will be briefly described.

  The motor sequence table MT02 accelerates the movable screen unit 700 in the positive direction, and the light shielding piece 791 (for example, the figure) is provided by the optical sensor 804 provided corresponding to the projection surface 7141 in the constant speed rotation after the acceleration is finished. Is a table that controls the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection plane 7141 stops at the projection plane origin position.

  The difference between the motor sequence table MT02 and the motor sequence table M01 is that in Step No. 7, the motor 812 is rotated at a constant speed until the light shielding piece 791 is detected not by the optical sensor 802 but by the optical sensor 804 (however, It is the same as the motor sequence table MT01) that the maximum is 432 pulses. That is, the motor sequence table MT02 differs from the motor sequence table MT01 in that the projection plane to be stopped at the projection plane origin position is the projection plane 7141 instead of the projection plane 7123, but the other points are the same as the motor sequence table MT01. is there.

  The motor sequence table MT03 accelerates the movable screen unit 700 in the positive direction, and the light shielding piece 791 (for example, the figure) is provided by the optical sensor 806 provided corresponding to the projection surface 7167 in the constant speed rotation after the acceleration is finished. Is a table that controls the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection surface 7167 stops at the projection plane origin position.

  The motor sequence table MT03 is different from the motor sequence table MT01 in that the motor 812 is rotated at a constant speed until the light shielding piece 791 is detected not by the optical sensor 802 but by the optical sensor 806 in Step No. 7 (however, It is the same as the motor sequence table MT01) that the maximum is 432 pulses. That is, the motor sequence table MT03 differs from the motor sequence table MT01 in that the projection plane to be stopped at the projection plane origin position is the projection plane 7167 instead of the projection plane 7123, but the other points are the same as the motor sequence table MT01. is there.

  The motor sequence table MT04 accelerates the movable screen unit 700 in the reverse direction, and the light shielding piece 791 (for example, the figure) is provided by the optical sensor 802 provided corresponding to the projection surface 7123 in the constant speed rotation after the acceleration is completed. Is a table that controls the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection plane 7123 stops at the projection plane origin position.

  The motor sequence table MT04 is different from the motor sequence table MT01 in that the direction in which the movable screen unit 700 is rotated is not the normal direction but the reverse direction, and the other points are the same as the motor sequence table MT01.

  The motor sequence table MT05 accelerates the movable screen unit 700 in the reverse direction, and the light shielding piece 791 (for example, the figure) is provided by the optical sensor 804 provided corresponding to the projection surface 7141 in the constant speed rotation after the acceleration is completed. Is a table that controls the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection plane 7141 stops at the projection plane origin position.

  The motor sequence table MT05 is different from the motor sequence table MT01 in that the direction in which the movable screen unit 700 is rotated is not the normal direction but the reverse direction, and in Step No. 7, the light shielding piece 791 is not an optical sensor 802 but a light beam. The motor 812 is rotated at a constant speed until the position is detected by the sensor 804 (however, a maximum of 432 pulses is the same as the motor sequence table MT01), and other points are the same as the motor sequence table MT01. is there. In other words, compared to the motor sequence table MT02, the motor sequence table MT05 differs from the motor sequence table MT02 only in that the direction in which the movable screen unit 700 is rotated is not the normal direction but the reverse direction.

  The motor sequence table MT06 accelerates the movable screen unit 700 in the reverse direction, and the light shielding piece 791 (for example, the figure) is provided by the optical sensor 806 provided corresponding to the projection surface 7167 in the constant speed rotation after the acceleration is finished. Is a table that controls the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection surface 7167 stops at the projection plane origin position.

  The motor sequence table MT06 is different from the motor sequence table MT01 in that the direction in which the movable screen unit 700 is rotated is not the normal direction but the reverse direction, and in Step No. 7, the light shielding piece 791 is not the optical sensor 802 but the light. The motor 812 is rotated at a constant speed until the position is detected by the sensor 806 (however, a maximum of 432 pulses is the same as the motor sequence table MT01), and the other points are the same as the motor sequence table MT01. is there. In other words, compared to the motor sequence table MT03, the motor sequence table MT05 differs from the motor sequence table MT03 only in that the direction in which the movable screen unit 700 is rotated is not the forward direction but the reverse direction.

  Next, the motor sequence table MT15 will be described in detail. The motor sequence table MT15 rotates the movable screen unit 700 in the forward direction after performing the roaring effect as one aspect of the expected effect that the player is expected to change to a more advantageous gaming state. Thus, this is a table for controlling the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 so that any one of the projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167 stops at the projection plane origin position. The motor sequence table MT15 includes step number 1 to step number 64 pulse control. In the motor sequence table MT15, the pulse width, the number of pulses, and the motor control state of the control signal of the motor 812 are set for each step.

  The motor sequence table MT15 is composed of control data of step number 1 to step number 64. Of these, step number 1 puts the movable screen unit 700 in a stopped state until the operation effect of the movable screen unit 700 is executed. This is control data for maintaining (entering the effect standby state). In Step No. 1, the A phase and the B phase are matched in the on state, and the -A phase and the -B phase are matched in the off state, and the rotation of the motor 812 is stopped.

  In Step No. 2 to Step No. 4, the B phase, -A phase, and -B phase are delayed by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees with respect to the A phase, respectively, and the pulse width is gradually increased for each step. The motor 812 is rotated in the positive direction by reducing the rotation.

  In step number 5 to step number 7, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step, and the rotation of the motor 812 is decelerated.

  In Step No. 8, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase of the motor 812 are matched in the on state, and the phase of the -A phase and the phase of the -B phase are matched in the off state. Stop rotating.

  In step number 9 to step number 11, the phases of -A phase, B phase, and A phase are delayed by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees with respect to -B phase, respectively, and the pulse width is gradually increased for each step. The rotation of the motor 812 is accelerated in the reverse direction by reducing the rotation.

  In step number 11 to step number 14, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step, and the rotation of the motor 812 is decelerated.

  In step number 15, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the ON state, and the phase of the -A phase and the phase of the -B phase are matched in the OFF state, and the rotation of the motor 812 is performed. Stop.

  In step number 16 to step number 18, the B phase, -A phase, and -B phase are delayed by 90, 180, and 270 degrees with respect to the A phase, respectively, and the pulse width is gradually increased for each step. The motor 812 is rotated in the positive direction by reducing the rotation.

  In step number 19 to step number 21, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step, and the rotation of the motor 812 is decelerated.

  In Step No. 22, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the on state, and the phase of the -A phase and the phase of the -B phase are matched in the off state to rotate the motor 812. Stop.

  In Step No. 23 to Step No. 25, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are reversed, and the pulse width is gradually reduced at each step to accelerate the rotation of the motor 812 in the reverse direction.

  In step number 26 to step number 28, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step, and the rotation of the motor 812 is decelerated.

  In Step No. 29, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the on state, and the phase of the -A phase and the phase of the -B phase are matched in the on state to rotate the motor 812. Stop.

  In step number 30 to step number 32, the phases of B phase, -A phase, and -B phase are delayed by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees, respectively, with respect to the A phase, and the pulse width is gradually increased for each step. The motor 812 is rotated in the positive direction by reducing the rotation.

  In step number 33 to step number 35, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step, and the rotation of the motor 812 is decelerated.

  In Step No. 36, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the on state, and the phase of the -A phase and the phase of the -B phase are matched in the on state to rotate the motor 812. Stop.

  In step number 37 to step number 39, the phases of -A phase, B phase, and A phase are delayed by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees, respectively, with respect to -B phase, and the pulse width is gradually reduced at each step. Then, the rotation of the motor 812 is accelerated in the reverse direction.

  In step number 40 to step number 42, the pulse width is gradually increased, and the rotation of the motor 812 is decelerated.

  In step number 43, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase of the motor 812 are set to the same phase, and the rotation of the motor 812 is stopped.

  In Step No. 44 to Step No. 46, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are opposite to each other, and the pulse width is gradually reduced to accelerate the rotation of the motor 812 in the forward direction.

  In step number 47 to step number 50, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step, and the rotation of the motor 812 is decelerated.

  In step number 51, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the ON state, and the phase of the -A phase and the phase of the -B phase are matched in the ON state, and the rotation of the motor 812 is performed. Stop.

  In step number 52 to step number 57, the phases of B phase, -A phase, and -B phase are respectively delayed by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees with respect to the A phase, and the pulse width is gradually increased for each step. The motor 812 is rotated in the positive direction by reducing the rotation.

  In step number 58, the motor 812 is rotated at a constant speed until the position of the light shielding piece 791 (see, for example, FIG. 24) is detected by any one of the optical sensors 802, 804, and 806.

  If the light shielding piece 791 (for example, see FIG. 24) is detected by the optical sensor 802 at step number 58, the process proceeds to step number 59 and thereafter. In step number 59 to step number 63, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step, and the rotation of the motor 812 is decelerated.

  Next, in Step No. 64, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the ON state, and the phase of the -A phase and the phase of the -B phase are matched in the ON state. Stop rotating.

  In the motor sequence table MT15, a transition effect (step number 1 to step number 51) in which forward rotation and reverse rotation are alternately repeated is performed by the above-described series of controls, thereby shifting to a highly advantageous gaming state. You can produce an effect that makes you expect.

  69 to 71 are verified based on design calculation values so that the movable screen unit 700 can be stopped in a state where the projection plane is at the projection plane origin position. Is the value derived by.

  Next, the motor sequence table MT20 will be described in detail. In this embodiment, although details will be described later, when the generation timing of the cancel request is during the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 based on the motor sequence table MT15, the motor sequence table is generated according to the generation timing of the cancel request. Either MT15 is continued or the motor sequence table MT15 is changed to another motor sequence table. The motor sequence table MT20 is one of the other motor sequence tables (that is, one of the change destination motor sequence tables when the cancel request is generated). The motor sequence table MT20 includes step number 1 to step number 14 pulse control.

  In the motor sequence table MT20, in step 1, the A phase and the B phase are matched in the ON state, and the -A phase and the -B phase are matched in the ON state. Then, the rotation of the motor 812 is stopped.

  In Step No. 2 to Step No. 7, the phases of the B phase, the -A phase, and the -B phase are delayed by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees with respect to the A phase, respectively, and the pulse width is gradually reduced for each step. Then, the rotation of the motor 812 is accelerated.

  In step number 8, the motor 812 is rotated at a constant speed until the optical sensor 802 is detected. In step number 8, the control signal is repeatedly turned on and off for a maximum of 432 pulses until the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802.

  When the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802 at step number 8, the process proceeds to step number 9 and subsequent steps. In step number 9 to step number 13, the pulse width is gradually increased for each step, and the rotation of the motor 812 is decelerated.

  In Step No. 14, the phase of the A phase and the phase of the B phase are matched in the off state, and the phase of the -A phase and the phase of the -B phase are matched in the on state to rotate the motor 812. Stop.

  In the motor sequence table M20, the movable screen unit 700 is rotated at the timing when the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 arrives at the projection plane origin position by rotating the movable screen unit 700 in the forward direction by the series of controls described above. Can be stopped.

[Screen character control task]
The screen object control task shown in FIG. 68 will be described. The sub CPU 151 first performs a screen accessory activation control process for activating the screen accessory (S41). In the screen accessory activation control process, the sub CPU 151 performs control to activate the drive driver of the motor 812 that rotationally drives the movable screen unit 700. Next, the sub CPU 151 determines whether there is screen feature data registered in S16 of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 66 (S42). This screen accessory data is data for requesting the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700. When it is determined in S42 that there is no screen combination data (when S42 is NO), the sub CPU 151 performs the process of S44.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S42 that there is screen accessory data (when S42 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 performs a screen accessory sequence process (S43), and then performs a process of S44. The details of the screen accessory sequence process (S43) will be described later.

  In S44, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the current step number is “−1” in the current motor sequence (for example, MT01) of the motor sequence table (motor control data) shown in FIGS. Here, “−1” means an end block in each motor sequence. That is, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the current motor sequence is finished. When it is determined in S44 that the current step number is not “−1” (when S44 is NO), the sub CPU 151 performs the screen accessory control process (S45). Details of the screen accessory control process (S45) will be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S44 that the current step number is “−1” (S44 is Yes), the current motor sequence has not ended, and the sub CPU 151 advances the process to S42. return.

  After S45, the sub CPU 151 performs a focus change process (S46), and then returns the process to S42.

  That is, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task constitutes a drive control unit and a locking control unit.

[Screen character sequence processing]
With reference to FIG. 73, the screen accessory sequence process (the process of S43 in FIG. 68) executed by the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the screen accessory sequence process in this embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 151 obtains screen accessory data registered in the sub RAM 152 (S51).

  Next, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the acquired screen accessory data has been canceled (whether or not the cancel request described above has occurred) (S52). In the present embodiment, a predetermined operation (for example, operation of the start lever 16, operation of the MAX bet button 15a, operation of the 1 bet button 15b, or stop buttons 17L and 17C by the player during the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is performed. , 17R), the main CPU 101 transmits a medal insertion command or a start command to the sub CPU 151. When the sub CPU 151 receives the medal insertion command or the start command from the main CPU 101, the sub screen 151 rotates the movable screen unit 700 during the medal insertion command reception process or the start command reception process of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 67). If so, a cancel request is generated. In S52, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not this cancel request has occurred (that is, whether or not there has been a request indicating that the cancel request has occurred).

  That is, the sub CPU 151 that executes the effect content determination processing, in response to a command transmitted from the main CPU 101, cancels the request for stopping the movable screen unit 700 that is rotating (stop request for stopping the driving of the drive mechanism 815). ) Is generated.

  If it is determined in S52 that the screen feature data has not been canceled, the sub CPU 151 uses the motor control data (for example, see FIGS. 69 to 71) of the motor sequence table corresponding to the screen feature data. Acquired and registered in the storage area for the motor sequence in the sub-RAM 152 (S54).

  Next, the sub CPU 151 acquires solenoid control data of a solenoid sequence table (see, for example, FIG. 72) corresponding to the screen accessory data, and registers it in the storage area for the solenoid sequence in the sub RAM 152 (S55).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the screen accessory data has been canceled, the sub CPU 151 performs a screen operation canceling process (S53). Details of the screen operation canceling process will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory sequence process constitutes a drive mode determination unit.

[Screen operation cancel processing]
With reference to FIGS. 74 and 76, the screen operation canceling process executed by the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) will be described. The screen operation canceling process is the process of S53 in FIG. 73, and the projection of the first screen member 712 is triggered by the fact that the generation timing of the cancel request is during the rotating operation of the movable screen unit 700 based on the motor sequence table MT15. This is a process of appropriately stopping the surface 7123 at the projection plane origin position (however, when the control based on the motor sequence table M15 is continued, the projection planes 7141 and 7167 are stopped at the projection plane origin position). FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the screen operation cancel process in the present embodiment. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a cancel check table referred to in S65 described later in the screen operation cancel process.

  First, the cancellation check table shown in FIG. 76 will be described. The cancel check table shown in FIG. 76 is a motor sequence table after change according to the timing when the cancel request is generated when the cancel request is generated during the rotating operation of the movable screen unit 700 based on the motor sequence table MT15. And a solenoid sequence table after the change, and is referred to in S65 described later. The generation timing of the cancel request is determined based on the sum (total) of the number of pulses from step number 1 in the motor sequence table MT15 to the step where the cancel request is generated.

  “Low” and “High” shown in the cancellation check table indicate which No (the total number of pulses output from the start of the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 until the cancellation request is generated, Number) to determine whether it belongs to a number).

  That is, although not shown in the flowchart, the sub CPU 151 has pulse number counting means for counting the total number of pulses output to the motor 812 during execution of control based on the motor sequence table MT15. During the execution of the control based on the motor sequence table MT15, for example, the pulse is output 15 times at step number 1, the pulse is output 4 times at step number 2 to step number 6, and the maximum number of pulses is 432 times at step number 7. The pulses output in this way are added one by one, and the total is counted. This total is the total number of pulses described above.

  Therefore, for example, when the sum (total) of the number of pulses from the start of the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 to the generation of the cancel request is 346, it is determined that it belongs to No3. In this way, by defining the changed motor sequence table and the changed solenoid sequence table according to the generation timing of the cancel request, the projection plane can be positioned at an appropriate position (projection plane origin position) when the cancel request is generated. ) Can be stopped smoothly. The “Low” value and the “High” value in the cancellation check table are values derived by verification based on design calculation values.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a screen operation cancel process executed by the sub CPU 151 will be described. First, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the motor sequence being executed (operating) is control based on the effect 15 (whether or not control is based on the motor sequence table MT15) (S61). If it is determined in S61 that the operating motor sequence is not the control based on the effect 15 (if S61 is NO), the sub CPU 151 ends the screen operation canceling process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S61 that the motor sequence being executed is control based on the effect 15 (when S61 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 performs control based on the motor sequence table MT15 being executed. The total number of pulses counted by the pulse number counting means described above (that is, the total number of pulses from when control based on the motor sequence table MT15 is started until when a cancel request is generated) is acquired (S62).

  Next, the sub CPU 151 sets the No (number) of the loop counter to the initial value “0” (S63). The No (number) of the loop counter corresponds to the No (number) of the cancellation check table.

  Next, the sub CPU 151 adds “1” to the No (number) of the loop counter (S64).

  Next, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the total number of pulses acquired in step S62 is a value between the Low value and the High value in the cancellation check table of FIG. 76 (S65). The Low value and the High value used in the determination in S65 are the Low value and the High value corresponding to the No (number) of the loop counter to which “1” is added in S64.

  If it is determined in S65 that the total number of pulses is not a value between the Low value and the High value in the cancellation check table of FIG. 76 (when S65 is NO), the sub CPU 151 The process returns to S64 and the process is performed (1 is added to the No (number) of the loop counter).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S61 that the motor sequence being executed is control based on the effect 15 (when S61 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 indicates that the No (number) of the loop counter in S64 is 5. It is determined whether or not there is (S66). In S66, when it is determined that the No (number) of the loop counter in S64 is 5 (when S66 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 ends the screen operation canceling process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S66 that the No (number) of the loop counter in S64 is not 5 (when S66 is No), the sub CPU 151 stores the motor control data stored in the motor control data storage area. Discard (S67). The sub CPU 151 also discards the solenoid control data stored in the solenoid control data storage area (S68).

  Next, the sub CPU 151 acquires motor control data of a motor sequence table (for example, see FIGS. 69 to 71) corresponding to the No (number) of the loop counter in S64, and stores the data in the motor control data in the sub RAM 152. Registration in the area (S69).

  The sub CPU 151 acquires the solenoid control data of the solenoid sequence table corresponding to the No (number) of the loop counter in S64, registers the data in the solenoid control data storage area in the sub RAM 152 (S70), and performs screen operation cancel processing. finish.

  Here, the processing after S65 will be described in detail. In the screen operation canceling process in the present embodiment, the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 is continued when the generation timing of the cancel request is being executed based on the motor sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15). However, if the projection plane can be smoothly stopped at an appropriate position (projection plane origin position), the cancel request is ignored and the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15) is continued. When the control based on the sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15) is continued, the motor sequence table MT15 and the solenoid can be stopped if the projection plane cannot be smoothly stopped at an appropriate position. The over Ken stable ST15, respectively, are performed based on the idea of changing the other motors sequence table and other solenoids sequence table.

  When a cancel request occurs when the total number of pulses in the motor sequence table MT15 is 0 to 299 (when the loop counter is No1), the sub CPU 151 changes the motor sequence table from MT15 to MT01, and the solenoid sequence table Is changed from ST15 to ST01, and the rotating operation of the movable screen unit 700 is executed. Here, the range where the total number of pulses is 0 to 299 corresponds to the turning effect of step number 1 to step number 51. That is, when a cancel request is generated during the execution of the saddle effect, the sub CPU 151 changes the motor sequence table from MT15 to MT01, changes the solenoid sequence table from ST15 to ST01, and changes to the motor sequence table MT01 after the change. The control based on the solenoid sequence table ST01 after the control based on the change and the change is started from step number 1. In this case, since the turning effect is stopped halfway, the projection plane 7123 of the first screen member 712 is accurately stopped at the projection plane origin position while shortening the time required for the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700. be able to.

  If a cancel request occurs when the total number of pulses in the motor sequence table MT15 is 300 to 345 (when the loop counter is No2), even if the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 and the solenoid sequence table ST15 is continued as it is Any one of the plurality of projection planes 7123, 7141, and 7167 can be accurately stopped at the projection plane origin position. Therefore, the sub CPU 151 ignores the generation of the cancel request and does not change the motor sequence table and the solenoid sequence table when the cancel request is generated while the total number of pulses is 300 to 345, so that the motor sequence table is not changed. Control based on the table MT15 and the solenoid sequence table ST15 is continued. Thereby, the sub CPU 151 can accurately stop any projection plane at the projection plane origin position in the shortest time. The range of the total number of pulses of 300 to 345 is considered to be the timing when the light shielding piece 791 has not yet been detected by any of the optical sensors 802, 804 and 806 after the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is started. .

  When a cancel request occurs when the total number of pulses in the motor sequence table MT15 is between 346 and 358 (when the loop counter is No3), the sub CPU 151 changes the motor sequence table from MT15 to MT20, and the solenoid sequence table Is changed from ST15 to ST20, and the rotating operation of the movable screen unit 700 is executed. When the total number of pulses is in the range of 346 to 358, even if control based on the motor sequence table MT15 and solenoid sequence table ST15 is continued, the motor sequence table is changed from MT15 to MT01 and the solenoid sequence table is changed from ST15 to ST01. Even if it does, it is thought that it is the timing which cannot stop the projection surface 7123 corresponding to the optical sensor 802 at the projection surface origin position.

  Here, the motor sequence table MT20 is significantly different from the motor sequence table MT01 when the movable screen unit 700 is accelerated, which is a step before step number 8 for determining whether or not the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802 in constant speed rotation. (Step number 7 in this embodiment) is that step number 7 having a pulse width of 3 and a pulse number of 40 is added. That is, the sub CPU 151 rotates the movable screen unit 700 by 40 pulses of step number 7 in addition to the number of pulses of step numbers 1 to 6, and if the motor sequence table MT15 is continued, the light shielding piece 791 is Even if it should be detected by such an optical sensor, it will rotate to a position beyond the detection range of the optical sensor. After that, in step number 8 of the motor sequence table MT20, constant speed rotation is performed until the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802, and the step number is determined based on the detection of the light shielding piece 791 by the optical sensor 802. The deceleration of 9 to step number 13 is performed. For this reason, the projection plane 7123 corresponding to the optical sensor 802 is reliably stopped at the origin of the projection plane, for example, by suppressing the occurrence of positional deviation (stopping at a position where the projection plane deviates from the projection plane origin). be able to.

  If a cancel request is generated at a timing at which the projection plane 7123 corresponding to the optical sensor 802 cannot be stopped at the projection plane origin position, the light shielding piece 791 may be detected by any of the optical sensors. Evenly, the motor sequence table is changed from MT15 to MT20 and the solenoid sequence table is changed from ST15 to ST20, so that the projection plane 7123 of the first screen member 712 stops at the projection plane origin position. . Accordingly, it is not only possible to suppress the occurrence of bugs by eliminating the need to change the processing for each optical sensor that detects the light shielding piece 791, but also the projection plane 7123 of the first screen member 712 is uniformly stopped at the projection plane origin position. be able to. In particular, since the sub CPU 151 does not determine which projection plane is at the projection plane origin position when the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is started, when the projection plane corresponding to the controlled gaming state stops at the projection plane origin position. Is not limited. Therefore, when a cancel request is generated at a timing at which the projection surface 7123 corresponding to the optical sensor 802 cannot be stopped at the projection plane origin position, the projection plane 7123 is uniformly and accurately stopped at the projection plane origin position. By doing so, the player is not given unnecessary expectation and discouragement.

  Next, when a cancel request occurs when the total number of pulses of the motor sequence table MT15 is between 359 and 432 (when the loop counter is No4), the sub CPU 151 changes the motor sequence table from MT15 to MT01, After changing the solenoid sequence table from ST15 to ST01, the rotating operation of the movable screen unit 700 is executed. When the sum of the number of pulses is in the range of 359 to 432, it is considered that the light shielding piece 791 may be detected by any of the optical sensors 802, 804, and 806 after the movable screen unit 700 starts to rotate. However, when the control based on the motor sequence table MT01 and the solenoid sequence table ST01 after the change is executed, since the control is started from step number 1, it is determined whether or not the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor. It is considered that the light shielding piece 791 moves outside the detection range from the optical sensor before reaching step number 7. In this way, when a cancel request occurs when the total number of pulses is between 359 and 432, the projection plane is obtained by changing the motor sequence table from MT15 to MT01 and changing the solenoid sequence table from ST15 to ST01. 7123 can be uniformly and accurately stopped at the projection plane origin position.

  As described above, when a cancel request is generated during the control of the drive mechanism 815 based on the motor sequence table MT15, when the loop counter is No1, No3, or No4, the condition for changing the motor sequence table is satisfied. That is, when the loop counter is No1, No3, or No4, the drive data change condition is configured. Therefore, when the loop counter is No1, No3, or No4, the drive data change condition is satisfied, and when the loop counter is No2, the drive data change condition is not satisfied.

  Note that “−1” illustrated in No. 5 of the cancellation check table in FIG. 76 indicates the end of the screen operation cancellation process.

  As described above, according to the screen operation canceling process, even when a cancel request is generated during the execution of the rotating operation of the movable screen unit 700 based on the motor sequence table MT15, the movable screen unit 700 is set according to the generation timing of the cancel request. Can be stopped properly.

  In addition, when a cancel request is generated during the execution of the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 based on the motor sequence table MT15, normally used drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT19) according to the generation timing of the cancel request. It is possible to use the dedicated motor sequence table MT20 when a cancel request is generated only when the drive data normally used cannot be used.

  When a cancel request is generated at a timing at which the projection plane 7123 corresponding to the optical sensor 802 cannot be stopped at the projection plane origin position, the movable screen unit 700 is rotated in the reverse direction and the light shielding piece 791 passes once. A method of executing control for stopping the movable screen unit 700 based on the detection by the optical sensor is also conceivable. However, in this case, the movable screen unit 700 flutters, and the projection plane is set to the projection plane origin position. Such a method is not taken because it cannot always be stopped reliably.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the generation timing of the cancel request is during control based on the motor sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15), the motor sequence table and the solenoid sequence table are the other motor sequence tables, respectively. And may be changed to other solenoid sequence tables. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a motor sequence table (solenoid sequence) other than the motor sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15), such as during execution of control based on the motor sequence table MT16 (solenoid sequence table ST16). Also, when a cancel request is generated during the execution of the control based on the table, the motor sequence table and the solenoid sequence table may be changed to another motor sequence table and another solenoid sequence table, respectively. In this case, it is necessary to count the total number of pulses output to the motor 812 during execution of the control based on the motor sequence table other than the motor sequence table MT15 by the pulse number counting means described above.

  In this embodiment, the sub CPU 151 does not determine which projection plane is at the projection plane origin position when the movable screen unit 700 starts to rotate. It may be determined whether or not is at the projection plane origin position. By doing so, when a cancel request is generated, the projection plane 7123 is not uniformly stopped at the projection plane origin position as in the present embodiment, but at the start of rotation of the movable screen unit 700, the projection plane origin position is set. The same projection plane as the existing projection plane can be stopped at the projection plane origin position.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen operation canceling process, based on the cancel check table during execution of the control based on the motor sequence table and the solenoid sequence table, and the motor sequence data registered in the cancel check table and Data changing means for changing control to solenoid sequence data, normal data changing means, and delay data changing means are configured. In addition, based on the cancellation check table, data maintaining means for maintaining control by the motor sequence data and solenoid sequence data being controlled is configured. More specifically, the sub CPU 151 that executes the processing of step S67 and step S69 in the case of the cancellation check table No1, No4 constitutes the normal data changing means, and the processing of step S67 and step S69 is executed in the case of the cancellation check table No3. The sub CPU 151 constitutes delay data changing means, and the sub CPU 151 that executes the processing of step S67 and step S69 in the case of the cancellation check table No2 constitutes data maintaining means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if a cancel request is generated during execution of control based on the motor sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15), the projection plane is smoothly stopped at an appropriate position (projection plane origin position). If possible, the control based on the motor sequence table MT15 is continued ignoring the cancel request. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control based on a specific motor sequence table (for example, the motor sequence table MT15) When a cancel request occurs during execution, a specific projection plane (for example, projection plane 7123) may be stopped at an appropriate position.

  In the present embodiment, when a cancel request is generated during execution of control based on the motor sequence table MT15 (solenoid sequence table ST15), the motor sequence table is changed to the motor sequence table MT01 or MT20 according to the timing at which the cancel request is generated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be changed uniformly to a specific motor sequence table (for example, motor sequence table MT20).

  The sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task in FIG. 68 constitutes a drive control means as described above.

[Screen character control processing]
With reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and 75, the screen accessory control process executed by the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) will be described. The screen accessory control process is the process of S45 in FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a solenoid sequence table in the present embodiment.

  Here, the solenoid sequence table shown in FIG. 72 will be described. The solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20 are solenoid control data for controlling on (energized state) and off (non-energized state) of the solenoid 792 of the stopper mechanism 790 that prevents the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. The solenoid sequence table is stored on the ROM cartridge substrate 86.

  That is, the solenoid sequence table shown in FIG. 72 constitutes lock release data, and the ROM cartridge substrate 86 that stores this solenoid sequence table constitutes drive data storage means and lock release data storage means.

  The solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20 correspond to the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20 in a one-to-one correspondence with each other with the same table number. For example, the solenoid sequence table ST01 corresponds to the motor sequence table MT01, the solenoid sequence table ST15 corresponds to the motor sequence table MT15, and the solenoid sequence table ST20 corresponds to the motor sequence table MT20. In addition to the illustration of motor sequence tables MT07 to MT14 and MT16 to MT19 being omitted in FIGS. 69 to 71, the illustration of solenoid sequence tables ST07 to ST14 and ST16 to ST19 is omitted in FIG.

  The solenoid sequence table ST01 will be described. Solenoid sequence table ST01 includes step number 1 to step number 3 and step number -1. In the solenoid sequence table ST01, the pulse width, the number of pulses, and the solenoid control state of the control signal of the solenoid 792 are set for each step number. One pulse of the control signal has a half-pulse width ON section and a half-pulse width OFF section, and the “pulse width” in FIG. 72 represents a half-pulse time (unit: ms) for convenience. Is shown. The solenoid control state "Hold" means that the stopper pin 7944 of the stopper mechanism 790 is electromagnetically held at the upper position in the vertical stroke by turning on the solenoid 792. In Step No. 1, the solenoid 792 is turned on for 40 (ms), and the stopper pin 7944 is held at the upper position during that time. The period 40 (ms) is derived by pulse width × 2 × number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 2 = 40 (ms).

  The solenoid control state “+” means that energization of the solenoid 792 is started. Further, the solenoid control state “−1” means that the control based on the solenoid sequence table ST01 is finished and the energization to the solenoid 792 is finished. When the energization of the solenoid 792 is completed, the stopper pin 7944 moves to a lower position (a position that can be engaged with a groove 7444 (see, for example, FIG. 39) of the gear-shaped portion 744). The same applies to other solenoid sequence tables.

  In step number 2 of the solenoid sequence table ST01, the solenoid 792 is kept on for a maximum of 432 pulses until the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802. When the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802, the process proceeds to step number 3, and the solenoid 792 is kept on for 420 (ms). During that time, the stopper pin 7944 is moved to the upper position (the gear shape portion 744 is And a groove 7444 that is not engaged with the groove 7444 (see, for example, FIG. 39). The period 420 (ms) is derived by pulse width × 2 × number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 21 = 420 (ms). Thereafter, the stopper pin 7944 moves to the lower position.

  The solenoid sequence table ST02 will be described. The solenoid sequence table ST02 is different from the solenoid sequence table ST01 in that, in step number 2, the solenoid 792 is turned on for a maximum of 432 pulses until the light shielding piece 791 is detected not by the optical sensor 802 but by the optical sensor 804. It is a point that is maintained. Except this point, it is the same as the solenoid sequence table ST01.

  The solenoid sequence table ST03 will be described. The difference between the solenoid sequence table ST03 and the solenoid sequence table ST01 is that the solenoid 792 is turned on for a maximum of 432 pulses until the light shielding piece 791 is detected not by the optical sensor 802 but by the optical sensor 806 in step number 2. It is a point that is maintained. Except this point, it is the same as the solenoid sequence table ST01.

  The solenoid sequence table ST04 will be described. The solenoid sequence table ST04 is different from the solenoid sequence table ST01 in that the solenoid 792 is kept on for 440 (ms) instead of 420 (ms) in step number 3, while the stopper pin 7944 is in the upper position. This is the point to be held. The period 440 (ms) is derived by pulse width × 2 × number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 22 = 440 (ms). Other points are the same as those of the solenoid sequence table ST01.

  The solenoid sequence table ST05 will be described. The solenoid sequence table ST05 is different from the solenoid sequence table ST02 in that in step number 3, the solenoid 792 is kept on for 440 (ms) instead of 420 (ms), while the stopper pin 7944 is in the upper position. This is the point to be held. The period 440 (ms) is derived by pulse width × 2 × number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 22 = 440 (ms). Other points are the same as those of the solenoid sequence table ST01.

  The solenoid sequence table ST06 will be described. The solenoid sequence table ST06 is different from the solenoid sequence table ST03 in that the solenoid 792 is kept on for 440 (ms) instead of 420 (ms) in step number 3, while the stopper pin 7944 is in the upper position. This is the point to be held. The period 440 (ms) is derived by pulse width × 2 × number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 22 = 440 (ms). Other points are the same as those of the solenoid sequence (ST01).

  The solenoid sequence table ST15 will be described. The difference between the solenoid sequence table ST15 and the solenoid sequence table ST01 is that the number of pulses is not a maximum of 432 until the light shielding piece 791 is detected not only by the optical sensor 802 but also by any of the optical sensors 802 to 806 in step number 2. The point is that the solenoid 792 is kept on for a maximum of 458 pulses. Other points are the same as those of the solenoid sequence table ST01.

  The solenoid sequence table ST20 will be described. The solenoid sequence table ST20 is different from the solenoid sequence table ST01 in that the solenoid 792 is operated for 480 (ms) in the step (step number 2) before step number 3 in which the optical sensor 802 determines whether the light shielding piece 791 is detected. In the meantime, the stopper pin 7944 is held at the upper position, and in step number 3 for determining whether or not the light-shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802, until the optical sensor 802 is detected, a maximum of 432 pulses. In other words, the solenoid 792 is kept on for a maximum of 950 pulses. Other points are the same as those of the solenoid sequence (ST01). The period 480 (ms) of step number 2 is derived by pulse width × 24 × number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 24 = 480 (ms). Further, the period 420 (ms) of the step number 4 is derived by pulse width × 21 × number of pulses, that is, 10 (ms) × 2 × 21 = 420 (ms).

  In the screen accessory control process, the sub CPU 151 controls the motor 812 based on any one of the motor sequence tables MT0 to MT20 (motor control data) and has a one-to-one correspondence with the motor sequence table being executed. The solenoid 792 is controlled based on the solenoid sequence table (solenoid control data) having the same table number.

  Specifically, for example, when the performance of the motor sequence table MT01 is performed, as shown in FIG. 75, the sub CPU 151 first stops the motor 812 for 300 ms in step number 1 of the motor sequence table MT01. A constant hold (electromagnetically fixed hold) is performed, and the solenoid 792 is energized (the solenoid 792 is turned on) to hold the stopper pin 7944 in the upper position. Next, in step number 2 to step number 6, the sub CPU 151 rotates the motor 812 to accelerate the rotation in the positive direction. Next, the sub CPU 151 rotates the motor 812 at a constant speed until the optical sensor 802 detects the light shielding piece 791 in step number 7. Next, the sub CPU 151 decelerates the rotation of the motor 812 from the time point t (step number 8 to step number 12) based on the time point t (see FIG. 75) when the light sensor 802 detects the light shielding piece 791. Next, the sub CPU 151 statically holds the motor 812 (electromagnetically statically held) at step number 13. Next, the sub CPU 151 maintains the electromagnetic stationary hold state of the motor 812 until a predetermined time (420 ms in the example shown in FIG. 75) elapses from the start of the electromagnetic stationary hold of the motor 812. As a result, the first projection plane reference groove stops at the groove origin position, and the stopper pin 9444 (see, for example, FIG. 38) and the first projection plane reference groove face each other. As described above, when the solenoid 792 is deenergized and the stopper pin 7944 is lowered while the stopper pin 9444 and the first projection plane reference groove are opposed to each other, the stopper pin 7944 is moved to the first projection plane reference. The movable screen unit 700 is prevented from rotating in a state where the projection surface 7123 is engaged with the groove and stopped at the projection surface origin position.

  In this way, the sub CPU 151 controls the motor 812 based on the motor sequence table, and controls the solenoid 792 based on the solenoid sequence table corresponding to the motor sequence table on a one-to-one basis, thereby providing a plurality of projection planes. With any one of 7123, 7141, and 7167 stopped at the projection plane origin position, the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 can be stopped (locked) by the stopper pin 7944. That is, immediately after the start of electromagnetic static hold of the motor 812, the motor 812 is not completely stopped, and a certain amount of time is required for complete stop. Therefore, the stopper pin 7944 is controlled so that the stopper pin 7944 is lowered while the electromagnetic static hold state of the motor 812 is maintained for a predetermined period, so that the stopper pin 7944 is moved from the first projection surface reference groove to the third projection surface reference groove. Any one of the plurality of projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 can be reliably stopped at the projection surface origin position, and the stopped state can be maintained. .

  That is, the gear-shaped portion 744 and the stopper mechanism 790 having a function of locking the movable screen unit 700 in a state where any one of the plurality of projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167 is stopped at the projection surface origin position is The stop mechanism is configured. Further, the groove 7444 included in the gear shape portion 744 constitutes a groove forming member. Furthermore, the stopper pin 7944 that can be engaged with the groove 7444 when the energization to the solenoid 792 is turned off and descends constitutes an engaging member.

  In the present embodiment, the stopper 794 is disposed above the groove origin position, the energization to the solenoid 792 is turned off, the stopper pin 7944 is lowered, and the stopper 794 and the groove 7444 are engaged. ing. According to this, it is preferable in that the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 can be stopped without energizing the solenoid 792, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the energization to the solenoid 792 is turned on, the stopper 794 is formed in the groove 7444. The stopper 794 and the groove 7444 may be engaged with each other.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped by engaging the groove 7444 at the groove origin position and the stopper 794. However, the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped. The mode is not limited to this, and it is only necessary to maintain the stopped state of the projection plane at the projection plane origin position, and various modes are conceivable.

  Even when the control based on the motor sequence tables MT02 to MT20 is executed, the solenoid sequence tables ST02 to ST20 corresponding one-to-one correspond to the case where the control based on the motor sequence table MT01 is executed. By executing the control based on the control, it is possible to achieve the same effect as when executing the control based on the motor sequence table MT01.

  Further, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20 all perform constant speed rotation until the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802 (or the optical sensors 804 and 806) (for example, the step is the motor sequence table MT20). Number 8). Similarly, in each of the solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20, the step of holding the stopper pin 7944 in the upper position until the light shielding piece 791 is detected by the optical sensor 802 (or the optical sensors 804 and 806) (for example, the solenoid sequence). The table ST20 has step number 3). Therefore, even when the movable screen unit 700 is in any position in the rotation direction at the start of the rotation of the movable screen unit 700, when the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 is finished, the sub CPU 151 includes a plurality of projection planes 7123, Any one of 7141 and 7167 can always be stopped at the projection plane origin position. For example, there are cases where the projection plane is shifted from the projection plane origin position, such as when the pachislot is introduced into the hall or when the hall clerk turns the movable screen unit 700 by hand. Even when the rotating operation of the movable screen unit 700 is started in such a state, the sub CPU 151, when the rotating operation of the movable screen unit 700 is finished, out of the plurality of projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167. Either of these can always be stopped at the projection plane origin position.

  72. The pulse width and the number of pulses in FIG. 72 are verified based on design calculation values so that the movable screen unit 700 can be stopped and maintained in a state where the projection plane is at the projection plane origin position. This is the derived value.

  By the way, generally, if the rotation of the motor 812 is stopped, the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped. Therefore, unless an external force is applied to the movable screen unit 700, the stopper pin 9444 (for example, FIG. 38) is not engaged with the groove 7444 (see, for example, FIG. 39) of the gear-shaped portion 744, the rotational operation of the movable screen unit 700 can be stopped. However, in this embodiment, there is a weight difference between the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167, so that the rotational balance becomes unbalanced, and a rotational force may act on the movable screen unit 700. As described above, although the center of gravity in the longitudinal direction of the columnar screen 710 is brought close to the rotation shaft 722 so that both are as coaxial as possible, the rotation balance is prevented from becoming unbalanced as much as possible. It is difficult to completely eliminate this imbalance. Therefore, in this embodiment, after stopping any one of the projection planes 7123, 7141, and 7167 of the movable screen unit 700 at the projection plane origin position, the stopper pin 7944 is engaged with the groove 7444, so that the projection plane The rotating operation of the movable screen unit 700 can be reliably stopped without energizing the motor 812 in a state where any one of 7123, 7141, and 7167 is stopped at the projection plane origin position. Although it is possible to stop the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 by stopping the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 at the projection plane origin position and then holding the motor 812 electromagnetically statically held, the motor This is not preferable because 812 may overheat and the life of the motor 812 may be shortened.

[Focus change processing]
With reference to FIG. 77, the focus change process executed by the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) will be described. The focus change process is the process of S46 in FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of focus change processing in the present embodiment.

  In the pachi-slot according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 is an aspect of an effect that causes the player to expect that the gaming state may shift from a general gaming state to an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state or a bonus gaming state). There is a lock effect performed by. This lock effect is executed, for example, when the main CPU 101 wins a lottery of various lock effects executed based on the result of the internal winning combination. When the lock effect is executed, the main CPU 101 invalidates the time based on the winning contents of detection by the BET switch 77, the start switch 79, and the stop switch (not shown), for example. When a lock effect is performed, there is a possibility that it will shift to an advantageous state when the lock effect ends, but it does not always shift to an advantageous state, and the general gaming state is maintained after the lock effect ends. In some cases. That is, in this embodiment, when winning various lock effects, the main CPU 101 generates an invalidation period for invalidating the player's operation at the time of starting or ending the game, based on the winning content. This constitutes an operation invalidating means capable of performing the above operation.

  As described above, the main control circuit 90 includes the main CPU 101 constituting the fluctuation control means, the stop control means, and the operation invalidation means, and the first serial communication circuit 114 constituting the information transmission means. And constitutes a first control means.

  The focus change process is a process for focusing the video light projected from the projector 213 when the gaming state is changed. In the present embodiment, since each projection plane 7123, 7141, 7167 and the game state correspond (the projection plane corresponding to the game state is located at the projection plane origin position), when the game state is changed Then, the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 is performed, and the projection plane located at the projection plane origin position is changed. However, when the lock effect is executed by the main CPU 101, the focus of the projector 213 is based on the end of the lock effect without adjusting the focus (focus) of the projector 213 until the lock effect ends. The control to match is executed.

  The reason why the control for adjusting the focus of the projector 213 is executed in accordance with the change of the gaming state is as follows. In other words, in the present embodiment, the shape varies depending on the projection planes 7123, 7141, and 7167, so that the projection is performed from the projector 213 (more specifically, the reflection mirror 237) depending on which projection plane is at the projection plane origin position. The distance to the surface is different. Therefore, it is necessary to perform a process for focusing the projector 213 in accordance with the projection plane at the projection plane origin position. However, when the lock effect is executed by the main CPU 101, if the process of focusing the projector 213 is executed before the lock effect ends, the player knows the gaming state after the lock effect ends. There is a risk that. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the projector 213 is focused based on the end of the lock effect without focusing the projector 213 until the lock effect ends.

  In addition, as a method of not focusing the projector 213 until the lock effect ends, the focus data corresponds to a projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7123) corresponding to the gaming state immediately before the lock effect is started. The focus data can be used as the focus data, and the focus data can be used as the focus data that does not correspond to any of the projection planes 7123, 7141, and 7167, either of which may be adopted.

  As shown in FIG. 77, first, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not there is a change in the screen, that is, the projection plane at the projection plane origin position (for example, the projection plane 7123) is another projection plane (for example, the projection plane). 7141 and the projection plane 7167) (that is, whether the gaming state is changed) is determined (S81). When it is determined in S81 that there is no screen change (when S81 is NO), the sub CPU 151 ends the focus change process. The sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the screen has been changed based on game state information transmitted from the main CPU 101. That is, the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 90 (first serial communication circuit 114) to the sub control circuit 150 includes game state information. It should be noted that the game state information also includes game state information after the end of the lock effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that there is a screen change (S81 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the lock effect that triggers the transition to an advantageous gaming state has ended. It discriminate | determines (S82). In S82, when it is determined that the lock effect has not ended (when S82 is No), the sub CPU 151 ends the focus change process. The determination as to whether or not the lock effect executed by the sub CPU 151 has ended is based on the lock effect end information transmitted from the main CPU 101.

  In addition, there is a case where the projection plane stopped at the projection plane origin position is changed in accordance with the change of the game state without executing the lock effect by the main CPU 101. In this case, the sub CPU 151 locks in S82. After confirming that the effect is not executed, the process proceeds to S83.

  On the other hand, in S82, when the sub CPU 151 determines that the lock effect has ended or that the lock effect has not started (S82 is Yes), the changed screen member is the first. It is determined whether or not the screen member is the first screen member 712 (S83). If it is determined in S83 that the changed screen member is not the first screen member 712 (when S83 is No), the sub CPU 151 shifts the process to S85.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S83 that the screen member after the change is the first screen member 712 (S83 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 performs a focus A setting transmission process (S84). The focus A setting transmission process is a process of transmitting focus data for focusing the projector 213 on the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 to a projector substrate (not shown). After S84, the sub CPU 151 ends the focus change process.

  In S85, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not the changed screen member is the second screen member 714. In S85, when it is determined that the changed screen member is not the second screen member 714 (when S85 is No), the sub CPU 151 shifts the processing to S87.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S85 that the changed screen member is the second screen member 714 (when S85 is Yes), the sub CPU 151 performs a focus B setting transmission process (S86). The focus B setting transmission process is a process of transmitting focus data for adjusting the focus of the projector 213 to the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 to a projector substrate (not shown). After S84, the sub CPU 151 ends the focus change process.

  In S87, the sub CPU 151 performs a focus C setting transmission process. The focus C setting transmission process is a process of transmitting focus data for adjusting the focus of the projector to the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 to a projector substrate (not shown). After S87, the sub CPU 151 ends the focus change process.

  That is, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task (more specifically, when it is determined that at least the screen member is changed (when it is determined that the gaming state is changed), a predetermined display area (for example, As the focus data of the effect image displayed on the projection plane stopped at the projection plane origin position), the focus data corresponding to the changed gaming state can be output to the display means (for example, the projector 213, the projector board). The CPU 151) constitutes focus data output means. And even if it is a case where it is judged that the gaming state is changed, the sub CPU 151 constituting the focus data output means receives the invalidation period (for example, the lock period) and receives the invalidation. Until the period ends, focus data corresponding to the changed gaming state is not output, and based on the end of the invalidation period, focus data corresponding to the changed gaming state is output to the display means. .

  As described above, the sub-control circuit 150 receives the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90, and performs information control means capable of executing control based on the received command, and focus data output It has sub CPU15 which comprises a means, and comprises a 2nd control means.

  According to this focus change process, when a lock effect is performed that triggers a transition from a general gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (for example, an ART gaming state or a bonus gaming state), until the locking state ends. During this time, it is possible to prevent the projector 213 from being focused on the projection plane. That is, the focus change process by the sub CPU 151 is executed after the lock effect is finished, and it becomes difficult for the player to detect the game state after the lock effect is finished during the execution of the lock effect. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Note that the execution timing of the focus change process executed by the sub CPU 151 may be any of the following. For example, if a lock effect start command and a lock effect end command are separately transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 151, the sub CPU 15 receives the lock effect start command and then receives the lock effect start command. The focus change process can be performed based on the reception of the end command. Further, when a lock effect start command and a lock effect end command are transmitted simultaneously from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 151 (for example, when a lock effect start command is transmitted, execution period information of the lock effect is transmitted together. If), after receiving the lock effect start command, the sub CPU 15 can perform the focus change process based on the fact that the execution period of the lock effect has elapsed.

  Further, it is preferable that the focus A setting transmission process (S84), the focus B setting transmission process (S86), and the focus C setting transmission process (S87) are executed almost simultaneously with the end of the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700. This is because if one of the processing for focusing the image light projected from the projector 213 and the rotation operation of the movable screen unit 700 is completed earlier than the other processing, the change is made at that time. This is because the gaming state may be detected.

  Further, when the focus change process is performed, a process for changing the image light projected from the projector 213 is also executed (although it is changed to the image light corresponding to the changed gaming state), such an image light is used. It is preferable that the process for changing the image is also executed almost simultaneously with the execution of the focus A setting transmission process (S84), the focus B setting transmission process (S86), and the focus C setting transmission process (S87). This is because if either one of the process of changing the image light and the process of focusing the image light projected from the projector 213 end earlier, the changed gaming state may be detected at that time. Because there is.

[Other expandability of gaming machine according to the present embodiment (first embodiment, second embodiment)]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the player's medal insertion operation (that is, an operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 14, or a credited medal is the MAX bet button 15a or the 1 bet button 15b. When the game is started by the operation of inserting and the medals are paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device 51 is driven and the medals are paid out from the medal payout outlet 24, or credit However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the present invention is applied to all forms in which a game medium necessary for a game is inserted by a player, a game is performed based on the game medium, and a privilege is granted based on the result of the game (for example, a medal is paid out). Can be applied. That is, not only the form in which a game medium is inserted (hanged) by a physical player's action and the game medium is paid out, but also the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) itself is a game medium held by the player. The game may be managed electromagnetically to enable a game without medals. In addition, the game media management apparatus that manages the game media that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) may electromagnetically manage the game media held by the player. .

  In this case, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is bidirectionally communicated with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. The game medium lending operation (that is, the operation for providing the necessary game medium when the player performs the operation of inserting the game medium) or the role relating to the payout of the game medium ( A game medium payout operation (that is, an operation for acquiring a game medium necessary for paying out a game medium to the player) or a game medium to be used for a game when the combination is established) It may be possible to perform an electromagnetic recording operation. The game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front surface of the pachislot 1 based on the management result of the number of game media, for example. A number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the held game media number display device may be managed. In other words, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

  In this case, it is desirable that the game medium management device has the following performances (a) to (c). B) Performance that allows a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game media handling device; b) Recording other than when the player directly operates Performance that cannot reduce the number of played game media, c) If an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the game media handling device and an external game media handling device, it must be through the external connection terminal plate The ability for the player not to send a signal indicating the number of recorded game media.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means that can be operated by the player, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a portable terminal, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, etc., a game medium handling device side external connection terminal board It may be provided (both not shown).

  As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits the valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is ended, the game media management device transmits the number of game media to the game media handling device by operating any of the return operation means. The medium handling device discharges the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the gaming table to play a game based on the gaming medium recorded on another table.

  In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game media handling device, but the game machine or the game media handling device transmits only the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media possessed by the player It may be divided and processed. In addition to discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be discharged or stored in a portable terminal or the like. In addition, the game medium handling device may be able to insert a member recording medium in the game hall and store it in the member recording medium so that it can be replayed at a later date.

  In addition, in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, it is possible to execute a lock operation for locking the game medium or the valuable data communication with respect to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown). Also good. In this case, information that can only be known by the player, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be stored by an imaging means provided in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device.

  As described above, this game medium management device may be one that allows games only without medals, or a game medium is inserted (hanged) by a physical player's action, and the game medium May be a form that allows the game to be paid out, a form that allows a game without medals, or a form that allows a game to be played in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device can adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 66 and the hopper device 51 described above, and these are controlled by the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71). Based on the transmission of the control result, a method is adopted that enables control to record and display the total number of game media that a player can use for games by an electromagnetic method. You can also.

  Further, in the above description, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachislot 1 has been described. However, in the slot machine and the enclosed game machine using the above-described game balls, the game medium management device is provided in the same manner, and the player It is also possible to manage the game media.

  As described above, by providing the above-described game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors 66, hopper devices 51, and the like inside the game machine as compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game. In addition to reducing the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine, it is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the game medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the number of devices. It will also reduce the power consumption. Also, it is possible to prevent illegal acts through game media and game media slot and payout port. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, a pachislot gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine according to the present invention is, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. There may be.

<Appendix (Summary of Inventions Related to Structure in Second Embodiment)>
[First to eighth game machines]
Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers on the program (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and a symbol combination (display combination) related to the winning of the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of a privilege given to a player, a game (such as a medal) is paid out, and a re-game (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which an internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. An operation of a bonus game in which a game medium payout opportunity increases can be cited.

  By the way, a gaming machine including a projector that projects image light toward the front has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2006-187444). In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-187444, the first projection member on which the image light projected from the projector is reflected to the back side of the gaming machine main body, and the reflected image light is projected. A second projection member. Then, image light representing a two-dimensional image is projected onto the projection surface of the first projection member, and image light representing a three-dimensional image is projected onto the projection surface of the second projection member. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that allows the image to feel a three-dimensional effect and depth.

(First issue)
However, in recent years, it has been possible to produce a video visual effect higher than before by effectively demonstrating the unique function of a gaming machine in which video is projected by video light projected from a projector. There is a demand to enhance interest.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to suitably enhance interest by performing an effect with a higher visual effect.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 1-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[1-1 gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes a plurality of projection areas (for example, projection of the first screen member 712). The image is displayed in any one of the projection area 7123, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716. Stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the movable projection member so as to be shaded, an image projected on one projection area among the plurality of projection areas, and The movable projection member is rotated in a circumferential direction in a manner in which any of the images projected on another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized, and the projection area is moved from the one projection area to the above-mentioned one projection area. Rotating means (for example, a driving mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742) that can be changed to another projection area are provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), a simple configuration in which a columnar movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is simply rotated in the circumferential direction is multifaceted using an outer peripheral surface of 360 degrees. By switching a part of the projection plane on which the video is projected (projection plane portion excluding the lower screen 7082), the video projected on one projection area (for example, the projection plane 7123 of the first screen member 712) and the other An effect can be realized in which both the projected image (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 or the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) can be visually recognized, and the interest can be enhanced. . Such an effect with a high visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized for the first time by making use of a function peculiar to a gaming machine in which an image is projected by projecting image light. .

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) projects an image by the image light projected from the projection unit (for example, the projector 213). As the plurality of projection areas, there are three projection areas (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). A triangular prism shape surrounded by the three projection regions.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, for example, when the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has a polygonal column shape surrounded by four or more projection areas, the projection means (for example, Projection irrelevant projection between one projection area and another projection area when the projection area on which the image is projected is changed from one projection area to another projection area by the image light projected from the projector 213) It may be necessary to go through an area. In this regard, the movable projection member has three projection areas (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). In the case of an enclosed triangular prism shape, the movable projection member is simply rotated about 120 degrees in the forward direction or the reverse direction, and immediately from one projection area to another projection area without passing through an unrelated projection area. It becomes possible to change to.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 1-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[1-2 gaming machines]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes a plurality of projection areas (for example, projection of the first screen member 712). The image is displayed in any one of the projection area 7123, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716. Stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the movable projection member so as to be shaded, an image projected on one projection area among the plurality of projection areas, and The movable projection member is rotated in a circumferential direction in a manner in which any of the images projected on another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized, and the projection area is moved from the one projection area to the above-mentioned one projection area. Rotating means (for example, drive mechanism 815 and large-diameter gear 742) that can be changed to another projection region, and the movable projection member has a three-dimensional shape of the projection surface onto which the image is projected. It has a plurality of different projection areas in the circumferential direction.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), a 360-degree outer peripheral surface can be formed with a simple configuration by simply rotating a columnar movable projection member movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction. It is possible to switch the projection plane in a multifaceted manner and realize an effect of visually recognizing both an image projected on one projection area and an image projected on another projection area, and can enhance the interest. Such an effect with a high visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized for the first time by making use of a function peculiar to a gaming machine in which an image is projected by projecting image light. . In addition, the movable projection member includes a plurality of projection regions (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714) having different three-dimensional (undulation) shapes of the projection surface onto which the image light is projected. Projection surface 7141 and projection surface 7167) of the third screen member 716 in the circumferential direction, so that the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface can visually recognize any of a plurality of projection areas. High performance can be performed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the plurality of projection areas (for example, projection surfaces of the first screen member 712) that the movable projection target (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has in the circumferential direction. 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) have a flat shape (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) and a convex shape (for example, a third surface). The projection surface 7167) of the screen member 716), the concave shape (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714), and the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining these have different projection surfaces. .

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the projection surface on which the image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) is flat (for example, the projection surface of the first screen member 712). 7123), a convex shape (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), a concave shape (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and a three-dimensional shape combining these shapes. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect than never before.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 1-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[1-3 gaming machines]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes a plurality of projection areas (for example, projection of the first screen member 712). The image is displayed in any one of the projection area 7123, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716. Stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the movable projection member so as to be shaded, an image projected on one projection area among the plurality of projection areas, and The movable projection member is arranged in the circumferential direction with a predetermined axis as a rotation axis (for example, the rotation axis 722) in a manner in which any image projected on another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized. Rotating means (for example, a drive mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742) that can be rotated to change the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area, and the movable projection member Has a plurality of projection areas with different three-dimensional shapes on the projection surface on which the image is projected in the circumferential direction, has a predetermined weight, and brings the center of gravity of the movable projection target member closer to the rotation axis. OK Not occupying weight member (e.g., weight member 7326,7366) and having a.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), a simple configuration in which a columnar movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is simply rotated in the circumferential direction is multifaceted using an outer peripheral surface of 360 degrees. By switching the projection plane, it is possible to realize an effect of visually recognizing both the image light projected on one projection area and the image light projected on another projection area. Such an effect with a high visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized for the first time by making use of a function peculiar to a gaming machine in which an image is projected by projecting image light. . Moreover, the movable projection member surrounds a plurality of projection regions (for example, the drive mechanism 815, the large-diameter gear 742, the stopper mechanism 790, and the gear-shaped portion 744) having different three-dimensional shapes on the projection surface onto which the image light is projected. Since it has in the direction, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect such that the three-dimensional shape of the projection plane can visually recognize all of the plurality of projection areas.

  By the way, when the movable projection member has a plurality of projection regions having different three-dimensional shapes of projection planes onto which image light is projected in the circumferential direction, the center of gravity of the movable projection member and the rotation axis (for example, the rotation axis 722). ) And the rotational balance of the movable projection member may become unbalanced. Therefore, by having a weight member that makes it possible to bring the center of gravity of the movable projection member and the rotation axis close to each other, there are a plurality of projection regions in the circumferential direction, each having a different three-dimensional shape of the projection surface onto which the image light is projected. However, it is possible to prevent the rotational balance of the movable projection member from becoming unbalanced, and it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a higher video visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the plurality of projection areas (for example, projection surfaces of the first screen member 712) that the movable projection target (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has in the circumferential direction. 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) are projections having different shapes from among a flat shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, and a solid shape combining these shapes. It has a surface.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the projection surface on which the image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) is a solid shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, and a combination of these. Since the shape can be changed to any one of the shapes, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect than ever before. Moreover, even if the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface can be variously changed to any one of a flat shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, and a combination of these three shapes, a movable projection member (for example, a movable screen) Since the weight member (for example, weight members 7326 and 7366) that makes it possible to bring the center of gravity of the unit 700) closer to the rotation axis, it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a higher visual effect.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 2-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[2-1 gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes a plurality of projection areas (for example, projection of the first screen member 712). The image is displayed in any one of the projection area 7123, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716. Stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the movable projection member so as to be shaded, an image projected on one projection area among the plurality of projection areas, and The movable projection member is rotated in a circumferential direction in a manner in which any of the images projected on another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized, and the projection area is moved from the one projection area to the above-mentioned one projection area. Rotating means (for example, a driving mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742) that can be changed to another projection area, and the stopping means has an operating member (for example, a stopper mechanism 790) that can be operated in the vertical direction. The movable projection member has an engagement portion (for example, a gear-shaped portion 744) that can be engaged with the operation member when the operation member is operated in the vertical direction in the circumferential direction at predetermined angles. Formed along Engaging members (e.g., protrusions 7442) which is characterized by having a.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) can be moved to the desired position with a simple configuration that simply operates the operation member (for example, the stopper mechanism 790) in the vertical direction. Can be stopped. In particular, if the predetermined angle (the angle at which the engaging member (for example, the protrusion 7442) is formed in the circumferential direction) is small, the movable projection target member is projected to an arbitrary position (for example, one projection region). The image is projected by projecting the image light such that the image light is stopped at a position where the image light and the image light projected onto another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized). This makes it possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect by making use of the functions peculiar to the gaming machine, which can enhance the interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the movable projection target (for example, the movable screen unit 700) projects an image by the image light projected from the projection unit (for example, the projector 213). As the plurality of projection areas, there are three projection areas (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). However, it is characterized by a triangular prism shape surrounded by the three projection regions.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, for example, when the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has a polygonal column shape surrounded by four or more projection areas, the projection means (for example, When changing the projection area onto which the image light projected from the projector 213) is projected from one projection area to another projection area, an irrelevant projection area is passed between the one projection area and the other projection area. May need to be done. In this regard, the movable projection member has three projection areas (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). In the case of an enclosed triangular prism shape, the movable projection member is simply rotated about 120 degrees in the forward direction or the reverse direction, and immediately from one projection area to another projection area without passing through an unrelated projection area. It becomes possible to change to.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 2-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[2-2 gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes a plurality of projection areas (for example, projection of the first screen member 712). The image is displayed in any one of the projection area 7123, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716. Stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the movable projection member so as to be shaded, an image projected on one projection area among the plurality of projection areas, and The movable projection member is rotated in a circumferential direction in a manner in which any of the images projected on another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized, and the projection area is moved from the one projection area to the above-mentioned one projection area. Rotating means (for example, a drive mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742) that can be changed to another projection area, and the stop means includes a rod-shaped operating member (for example, a stopper pin 7944) that can be operated in the vertical direction. And the movable projection member is directed radially outward at every predetermined angle so that the tip of the rod-like actuating member can be engaged when the rod-like actuating member is actuated in the vertical direction. A protruding rib (for example, a projecting portion 7442) has an engaging member (for example, a gear-shaped portion 744) formed along the circumferential direction, and the rod-shaped operating member has a corner portion of the tip portion. It is characterized by chamfering.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the rod-like operating member is simply configured to actuate the rod-like actuating member (for example, the stopper pin 7944) in the vertical direction, and the rod-like actuating member is configured with the rib (for example, the projecting portion 7442) and the rib. The movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) can be stopped at a desired position. Moreover, since the rod-like actuating member has a chamfered corner at the tip, the movable projection member has moved in the circumferential direction even if it is caught without being engaged between the ribs. Sometimes the ribs push up the rod-like actuating member to prevent catching.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 2-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[2-3 gaming machines]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes a plurality of projection areas (for example, projection of the first screen member 712). The image is displayed in any one of the projection area 7123, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716. Stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the movable projection member so as to be shaded, an image projected on one projection area among the plurality of projection areas, and The movable projection member is rotated in a circumferential direction in a manner in which any of the images projected on another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized, and the projection area is moved from the one projection area to the above-mentioned one projection area. Rotating means (for example, a drive mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742) that can be changed to another projection area, and the stop means includes a rod-shaped operating member (for example, a stopper pin 7944) that can be operated in the vertical direction. And the movable projection member is radially outward at predetermined angles so that the tip of the rod-like actuating member can be engaged when the rod-like actuating member is actuated in the vertical direction. A protruding rib (e.g., protrusion 7442) has an engaging member (e.g., a gear-shaped portion 744) formed along the circumferential direction, and the rib formed on the engaging member is The radially outer portion is formed so as to swell in the circumferential direction as compared with the radially inner portion.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the rod-like operating member is simply configured to actuate the rod-like actuating member (for example, the stopper pin 7944) in the vertical direction, and the rod-like actuating member is configured with the rib (for example, the projecting portion 7442) and the rib. The movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) can be stopped at a desired position. Moreover, since the rib formed on the engaging member is formed so that the radially outer portion swells in the circumferential direction compared to the radially inner portion, once engaged between the rib and the rib, The engagement is difficult to disengage and the movable projection member can be prevented from rotating unintentionally.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Third gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and position detection means (for example, an optical sensor unit) capable of detecting the position of the movable projection member in the circumferential direction. The movable projection member driving means responds to the fact that the position detection means detects that the movable projection member is at a specific position in the circumferential direction. And a stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the rotation of the movable projection member at a specified position, and the position detection means has a longitudinal direction extending in the circumferential direction. And a sensor capable of detecting passage of the shielding member, and the shielding member and the sensor rotate relatively with the rotation of the movable projection member. And the stopping means is configured to stop the rotation of the movable projection member in response to the passage of the shielding member being detected by the sensor. The length in the circumferential direction is the length detected by the sensor even if the movable projection member stops rotating after rotating through a predetermined angle after passing through the sensor. And wherein the are.

  According to the above gaming machine (1), the rotation of the movable projection target member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is stopped in response to the passage of the shielding member (for example, the light shielding piece 791) being detected by the sensor. In this case, a predetermined time is required until the movable projection member decelerates and actually stops. In consideration of this predetermined time, the shielding member passes the sensor in the circumferential length. Then, even if the rotation of the movable projection member stops after rotating by a predetermined angle, the length is detected by the sensor. Thereby, for example, if the shielding member is not detected by the sensor when the rotation of the movable projection member is stopped, it can be determined that the positional deviation has occurred. Therefore, for example, even if a trouble such as misalignment occurs, the subsequent processing can be appropriately performed, so that an effect with a higher visual effect can be suitably performed.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 4-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[4-1 gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. And a movable projection member driving means capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction. (E.g., a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member includes a first projection surface (e.g., a first projection area). A projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 or a projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) and a second projection region adjacent to the first projection region. At least a shadow surface (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712), and a bonding groove (for example, a groove 7142) is formed on the back surface of the first projection surface. The prismatic corner is formed by the first projection surface and the second projection surface by bonding the back surface of the second projection surface.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the bonding groove formed on the back surface of the first projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 or the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). By joining the back surface of the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712), a prismatic corner is formed by the first projection surface and the second projection surface. Therefore, it is possible to fill a gap between the two portions that may occur at the joint portion between the end portion on the long side of the first projection plane and the end portion on the long side of the second projection plane. Therefore, even if a movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the prismatic corner portion can be seen in front view, the continuity of the images projected from the projector (for example, the projector 213) Can be suppressed as much as possible, and the discomfort that can be caused by the gap between the long-side end of the first projection surface and the long-side end of the second projection surface is generated. Since it can reduce, the production | presentation with a higher video visual effect can be performed suitably.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 4-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[4-2th game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. A movable projection member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a prismatic shape in the circumferential direction, and a movable projection member driving unit capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction. For example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member includes a first projection surface (for example, a first projection surface) that constitutes a first projection region. Projection plane 7123 of one screen member 712) and a second projection plane (for example, projection plane of second screen member 714) constituting a second projection area adjacent to the first projection area. 141 or the projection surface 7167) of the third screen member 716, and the first projection surface and the second projection surface form the first projection surface forming the prismatic corner. It is characterized by being fixed by the rod-shaped member (for example, arm member 7144) which straddles the back surface side of this and the back surface side of the said 2nd projection surface.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first projection plane and the second projection plane are the back side of the first projection plane that forms a prismatic corner and the second projection plane. Since it is fixed by a rod-like member (for example, arm member 7144) straddling the back surface side, the first projection surface and the second projection surface can be firmly joined, and the length of the first projection surface It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the two that may occur at the joint between the end on the side and the end on the long side of the second projection surface. Therefore, even if the movable projection target member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the prismatic corner portion can be seen in front view, the image light projected from the projection unit (for example, the projector 213) It is possible to suppress the interruption of the continuity of the projected image as much as possible, and between the long side end of the first projection surface and the long side end of the second projection surface. Since the discomfort that can be caused by the gap can be reduced, it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a higher visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the rod-shaped member (for example, the arm member 7144) straddling the back surface side of the first projection surface and the back surface side of the second projection surface is the movable type. A plurality of the projection target members (for example, the movable screen unit 700) are provided along the longitudinal direction, whereby the first projection surface and the second projection surface are fixed.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since a plurality of rod-like members (for example, arm members 7144) are provided along the longitudinal direction of the movable projection target (for example, movable screen unit 700), the first projection The generation of the gap can be suppressed even in the middle part where the gap is particularly likely to occur between the surface and the second projection plane.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) forms the prismatic corner of the first projection surface. A joining groove (for example, a groove 7142) is formed on the back surface of the part, and the back surface of the second projection surface is joined to the joining groove.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the back surface of the second projection surface is bonded to the bonding groove (for example, the groove 7142) formed on the back surface of the first projection surface that forms a prismatic corner. Therefore, it is possible to fill a gap between the two sides that may occur at the junction between the long side end of the first projection plane and the long side end of the second projection plane. Therefore, even if a movable projection target member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is positioned at a position where the prismatic corner portion can be seen in front view, a series of images projected from the projection unit (for example, the projector 213) is continuous. Discomfort can be suppressed as much as possible, and discomfort that can be caused by a gap between the long side end of the first projection surface and the long side end of the second projection surface Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a higher video visual effect.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 4-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[4-3 gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. A movable projection member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a prismatic shape in the circumferential direction, and a movable projection member driving unit capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction. For example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member includes a first projection surface (for example, a first projection surface) that constitutes a first projection region. Projection screen 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection surface (for example, projection surface of the third screen member 716) constituting the second projection region adjacent to the first projection region. 167) and at least one of the first projection surface and the second projection (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) on the back surface side. At least two ribs (for example, female ribs 7164) are formed toward the projection surface side of the projection surface, and at least one rib is formed on the rear surface side of the other projection surface toward the rear surface side of the one projection surface. (For example, a male rib 7145) is formed, and the first projection surface and the second projection surface are formed by one rib formed on the back side of the other projection surface. It fixes in the aspect pinched between the two ribs formed in the back surface side.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first projection plane (for example, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the second projection plane (for example, the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716). One rib (for example, male rib 7145) formed on the back side of the other projection surface is sandwiched between two ribs (for example, female rib 7164) formed on the back surface side of one projection surface. Therefore, the first projection surface and the second projection surface can be firmly joined, and the occurrence of a gap between them can be suppressed. Therefore, even if a movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the prismatic corner portion can be seen in front view, the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) Since it is possible to suppress the continuity of the projected image from being interrupted as much as possible, and to reduce discomfort that may be caused by the gap between the first projection surface and the second projection surface, An effect with a higher visual effect can be suitably performed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is the first projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714). A bonding groove (for example, groove 7143) is formed on the back surface of the portion forming the prismatic corner of the second projection surface (for example, the projection of the third screen member 716). The back surface of the surface 7167) is configured to be bonded.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, a joining groove (for example, formed on the back surface of the first projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) that forms a prismatic corner portion). Since the back surface of the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) is joined to the groove 7143), it can occur at the joint portion between the first projection surface and the second projection surface. The gap between the two can be filled. Therefore, even if the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the prismatic corner portion can be seen in front view, the projection is further performed from the projection unit (for example, the projector 213). It is possible to prevent the continuity of the image projected by the image light from being interrupted, and to reduce discomfort that may be caused by the gap between the first projection surface and the second projection surface.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Fifth game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Is provided in the base member, and a prismatic movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) having a base member (for example, the right base 732) attached to the end in the longitudinal direction. The movable projection member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744) capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction. And the movable projection member includes a first projection surface (for example, a projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) constituting a first projection region. A second projection plane (for example, projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714) constituting a second projection area adjacent to the first projection area, and a third projection area adjacent to the second projection area. A plurality of corners having at least a third projection surface (for example, a projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) constituting the projection region and forming the prism shape between the projection surfaces adjacent to each other. And an attachment defining member for defining an attachment direction of the base member on at least one of the plurality of corners on the back side of the two projection planes forming the one corner. For example, an attachment defining rib 7122) is provided.

  According to the gaming machine (1) above, the base member can be easily attached to the end of the movable projection member. In this way, by improving the assembly work efficiency, it is possible to suitably realize an effect with a high visual effect.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 6-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[6-1 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting video light, and a projection area where a video is projected by the video light projected from the projection unit. It has at least a first projection region (for example, a projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection region (for example, a projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and the projection region can be changed. A movable projecting member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) configured and movable projecting member driving means (for example, a driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, and the like) capable of operating the movable projecting member. A stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes an image projected on the first projection area and the second projection area. Said movable projection target member in a manner that is visible any of the image projected, characterized in that it is configured to be actuated.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the image light projected on the first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the second projection area (for example, the third screen member). It is possible to realize an effect in which both the image light projected onto the projection surface 7167) of 716 can be visually recognized and the interest can be enhanced. Such an effect with a high visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized for the first time by making use of a projector-specific function.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection area onto which the image light is projected and the projection in the second projection area onto which the image light is projected The three-dimensional shape of the surface is constituted by different shapes.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection region are different from each other, the video visual effect is improved. A higher performance can be performed.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 6-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[6-2th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting video light, and a projection area where a video is projected by the video light projected from the projection unit. It has at least a first projection region (for example, a projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection region (for example, a projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and the projection region can be changed. A movable projecting member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) configured and movable projecting member driving means (for example, a driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, and the like) capable of operating the movable projecting member. A stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744), and a fixed projection area (for example, a lower screen 7082) on which an image projected from the projection unit is projected. A fixed projection member (e.g., a fixed base 708), and the movable projection member driving means includes the first projection region in a state where the image is projected onto the fixed display region. The projection area can be changed between the second projection area and the second projection area.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the second projection area (with the image projected on the fixed display area). For example, since the projection area can be changed with respect to the projection surface 7167) of the third screen member 716, it is possible to realize an effect with a higher video visual effect and enhance the interest. In particular, when one projection area is formed by the projection area of the movable projection member and the fixed projection area (eg, the lower screen 7082) of the fixed projection member (eg, the fixed base 708). , The visual effect of the image is further enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the three-dimensional shape of a projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) in the first projection area on which the image is projected, and the image The three-dimensional shape of the projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) in the second projection region on which is projected is configured to be different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the three-dimensional shape of the projection plane in the first projection area (for example, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the projection plane in the second projection area (for example, the third projection area). Since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface 7167) of the screen member 716 is different from each other, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[No. 6-3 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting video light, and a projection area where a video is projected by the video light projected from the projection unit. It has at least a first projection region (for example, a projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection region (for example, a projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and the projection region can be changed. Movable projection member material (for example, movable screen unit 700) configured and movable projection member drive means (for example, drive mechanism 815, large-diameter gear 742) capable of operating the movable projection part , A stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes an image projected on the first display area and the second display area. The movable projection member can be operated in a manner in which both of the projected images can be visually recognized, and the movable projection member is at least one of the first projection area and the second projection area. It is characterized in that a shadow area is formed in the projected area.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the shadow area is formed in at least one of the first projection area and the second projection area, it is possible to achieve an effect with a higher video visual effect. , Can enhance the interest. That is, although the image light projected from the projection means can be projected originally, the image light is not projected and a shadow region is formed. As a result, for example, a hidden video that cannot be visually recognized in the shaded area is projected, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the movable projected member is operated so that the hidden video is projected. It can be realized.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, at least one of the projection planes constituting the first projection area and the projection plane constituting the second projection area is the projection It has the convex part which swells to the means side.

  According to the above gaming machine (2), it is possible to produce an effect with a higher video visual effect with a simple configuration having only a convex portion bulging toward the projection means.

  Note that “inflating toward the projection unit” means that when image light is directly projected onto the projection surface by the projection unit such as a projector, the projection unit swells toward the projection unit such as the projector. When the image light projected by the projection means such as a projector is reflected on a reflecting member such as a mirror and then projected on the projection surface, it means that the image light swells toward the reflecting member such as the mirror.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 7-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[7-1th gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a plurality of game states (for example, general game states) having different advantages for the player. Gaming state control means (for example, main control board 71) and projection means (for example, projector 213) capable of projecting video light according to the result of the lottery. And a movable projection member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a plurality of projection areas as projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means, and operating the movable projection member Movable projection member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, and a gear-shaped portion 744) that can be moved, and the movable projection member is As a projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the shadow means, the projection area has at least a first projection area and a second projection area, and is operated by the movable projection member driving means. And a three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection area where the image is projected by the image light, and a projection in the second projection area where the image is projected by the image light. The three-dimensional shapes of the surfaces are different from each other, and the movable projection member driving means projects the image light projected from the projection means onto different projection areas according to the gaming state. As described above, the movable projection member is configured to be operable.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the projection area on which the image is projected is changed according to the gaming state by the image light projected from the projection means, and it is easy to operate the movable projection member. With this configuration, it is possible to project an image on a projection plane with different image visual effects depending on the gaming state. Moreover, since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection region are different from each other, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect. Become.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a seventh-second game machine having the following configuration.

[7-2 gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a plurality of game states (for example, general game states) having different advantages for the player. Gaming state control means (for example, main control board 71) and projection means (for example, projector 213) capable of projecting video light according to the result of the lottery. And a movable projection member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a plurality of projection areas as projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means, and operating the movable projection member Movable projection member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, and a gear-shaped portion 744) that can be moved, and the movable projection member is As a projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the shadow means, the projection area has at least a first projection area and a second projection area, and is operated by the movable projection member driving means. And a three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection area where the image is projected by the image light, and a projection in the second projection area where the image is projected by the image light. The three-dimensional shapes of the surfaces are different from each other, and the movable projection member driving means projects the image light projected from the projection means onto different projection areas according to the gaming state. The movable projection member can be operated as described above, and one projection area (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) of the plurality of projection areas and the one The movable projection target member can be operated so that forward rotation and reverse rotation are repeatedly performed between other projection regions adjacent to the projection region (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714). It is characterized by being configured.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the projection area on which the image is projected is changed according to the gaming state by the image light projected from the projection means, and it is easy to operate the movable projection member. With this configuration, it is possible to project an image on a projection plane with different image visual effects depending on the gaming state. Moreover, since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection region are different from each other, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect. Become. Furthermore, the video light projected from the projection means repeatedly forward and reverse rotation between one projection area and another projection area while the image is projected onto different projection areas depending on the gaming state. Since this is possible, it is possible to produce an effect that expects which projection area the image light is projected onto. For example, in a relatively advantageous gaming state, when image light is projected onto one projection area, and in a relatively unfavorable gaming state, image light is projected onto another projection area, one projection area and another projection By repeatedly performing forward rotation and reverse rotation with the region, it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a high video visual effect.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Eighth game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means) for performing lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game proceeds according to the result of the lottery, Projection means (for example, projector 213) capable of projecting predetermined image light, and image light control means (for example, sub-control board 72) capable of controlling an image projected by the image light projected from the projection means. ) And a projection area in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit, a first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) and a second projection area (for example, A movable projection member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having at least a projection surface 7141) of the second screen member 714, and image light projected from the projection means. A fixed projection member having a fixed projection area on which an image is projected (for example, a lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708), and a movable projection member driving means capable of operating the movable projection member ( For example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the image light control means includes a first image light according to the lottery result and a first unrelated to the lottery result. 2 video light can be projected, and an image projected by the first video light (for example, effect image) is projected at least on a projection area of the movable projection member, and the first An image (for example, an information image) projected by two image lights is configured to be projected onto at least a projection area of the fixed projection target member. And features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the image projected by the first image light according to the lottery result is projected at least on the projection area of the movable projection target member, and the lottery result has no relation to the lottery result. Since the image projected by the two image lights is projected at least on the projection area of the fixed projection member, the image projected by the second image light is projected on the projection area of the fixed projection member, An image projected by the first image light can be projected onto a projection area of the movable projection target member, and an effect with a high image visual effect can be suitably performed.

  According to the 1st-8th game machine of this invention of the said structure, it becomes possible to perform an effect with a higher video visual effect suitably.

[9th to 12th game machines]
Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known.

  The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start.

  The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do.

  The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers on the program (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and a symbol combination (display combination) related to the winning of the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player.

  By the way, there has been proposed a gaming machine that includes a liquid crystal display device that produces an effect according to a lottery result and includes a light guide plate on the front side of the display area of the display device. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-8744).

  The liquid crystal display device of a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-8744 has a display area facing a front direction so that a player can see a display area where an effect is performed, and a light guide plate is provided on the front side of the display area. However, in recent years, it has been required to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

  In addition, although it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest by providing the light guide plate, since a corresponding area is required for the installation space, there is a possibility that problems such as pressure on the installation space of other devices may occur. was there.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to enhance interest by suitably performing an effect with a higher video visual effect.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 9-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1th game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted, and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) on which an image appears by incorporating the predetermined light. The light guide plate includes a light incident part (for example, a side surface 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side) where the predetermined light is incident, and the light is incident from the light incident part. Display surface portions (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3) that appear, the display surface portions are inclined with respect to a traveling direction of predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portions, and the light guide plate The light incident part is formed so as to be opposed to the light emitting surface part.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the display surface portion (for example, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) of the light guide plate with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921). And is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate, so that an image can be seen from a different viewpoint from the conventional one while reducing the installation space. The visual effect can be further enhanced.

  By the way, if the display surface portion (for example, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) of the light guide plate is arranged to be inclined leftward and / or rightward with respect to the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921), the light emitting surface portion and the light emitting surface portion are guided. There is a possibility that a predetermined angle is formed between the light incident portion (for example, the side surfaces 911A1, 911B3, and 911C3 on the base end side) of the optical plate, and light from the light emitting surface portion may not be sufficiently incident on the light guide plate. Accordingly, the light incident portion of the light guide plate is formed so as to face the light emitting surface portion so that the light can be sufficiently incident, and the video visual effect is preferably enhanced.

  Note that “an image appears by taking in predetermined light” is not limited to the fact that an image does not appear in normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). . For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a ninth-second game machine having the following configuration.

[No. 9-2 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a light-emitting plate (for example, a light-emitting surface of the LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted and a light-guide plate (for example, a display surface unit that displays an image by incorporating the predetermined light) (for example, A light guide plate 911) and a reflective surface portion (for example, an inner surface) that is provided in a wall shape and is inclined with respect to a traveling direction of predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and is capable of reflecting an image displayed on the light guide plate. The light guide plate is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion inside the reflection surface portion in a front view. In addition, by being substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate, both the image displayed on the display surface portion and the reflected image where the image is reflected on the reflective surface portion are displayed. Visible Cormorant constructed and characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the display surface portion of the light guide plate is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921), and Since it is substantially parallel to the direction of travel of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate, the image can be viewed from a different viewpoint from the conventional one while saving the installation space, and the video visual effect is further enhanced. Can do.

  In addition, since both the image displayed on the display surface portion and the reflected image in which the image is reflected on the reflection surface portion (for example, the inner wall 914L, 914R) can be visually recognized, the production has a higher visual effect. Can be performed.

  Note that “an image appears by taking in predetermined light” is not limited to the fact that an image does not appear in normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). . For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a ninth to third gaming machines having the following configuration.

[No. 9-3 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted, and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) on which an image appears by incorporating the predetermined light. The light guide plate includes a light incident part (for example, a side surface 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side) where the predetermined light is incident, and the light is incident from the light incident part. Display surface portions (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) that appear, and emission portions (for example, side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the opposite base side) that emit light incident from the light incident portion The display surface portion is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate. , The injection unit is characterized in that angle formed between the front surface of the display surface is cut such that acute angle.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the display surface portion (for example, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) of the light guide plate with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921). And is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate, so that an image can be seen from a different viewpoint from the conventional one while reducing the installation space. The visual effect can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the light guide plate emission portion (for example, the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base end side) is cut so that the angle formed with the front surface of the display surface portion of the light guide plate is an acute angle. The light emitted from the emitting unit can be made difficult to visually recognize from the player side, and the third party is informed of the state of the gaming machine using the light emitted from the emitting unit. It becomes possible to do. In this way, it is possible to improve the video visual effect more preferably.

  Note that “an image appears by taking in predetermined light” is not limited to the fact that an image does not appear in normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). . For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 10th-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[10-1 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted, and a first light guide plate (for example, a first light guide plate) on which the predetermined light is introduced. 1 light guide plate 911A) and a second light guide plate (for example, second light guide plate 911B), and the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate receive the predetermined light. A light incident portion (for example, a proximal side surface 911A1 and a proximal side surface 911B1), and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911A3 and a flat surface 911B3) on which the image appears due to light incident from the light incident portion. And an exit portion for emitting light incident from the light entrance portion (for example, the side surface 911A2 on the opposite base side and the side surface 911B2 on the opposite base side), and the display surface portions thereof are facing each other. These display surfaces are Are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the part, and are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate, A rib having an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the light incident portion toward the emitting portion between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate (for example, rib 9113A). , 9115A, 9117A, 9119A).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first light guide plate (for example, the first light guide plate 911A) and the second light guide plate (for example, the second light guide plate 911B) are connected to each other display surface portion ( For example, while the flat surfaces 911A3) are opposed to each other, these display surface portions are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of a predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921), and are taken into the light guide plate. Further, they are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize images appearing on the respective light guide plates with parallax (displacement) while reducing the installation space, and an effect with a high visual effect can be performed.

  In addition, a rib (for example, ribs 9113A and 9115A) having an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the light incident portion toward the emission portion between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate. 9117A, 9119A). Therefore, the distance between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is the largest on the light incident portion side and gradually decreases toward the emission portion side. Thereby, on the light incident part side, it is possible to suppress the light incident from the light sources that should be incident on the other light guide plates, and on the emission part side, the light emission part of the first light guide plate and the second light incident part. Since the distance from the light guide plate emitting portion is reduced, it is possible to emit thick light and to increase the appeal to a third party.

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) above further includes a third light guide plate (for example, a third light guide plate 911C) on which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light, and the third guide. The light plate includes a light incident part (for example, a side surface 911C1 on the base end side) into which the predetermined light enters, and a display surface part (for example, a flat surface 911C3) on which the image appears by the light incident from the light incident part. And an emission part (for example, a side surface 911C2 on the opposite base end side) that emits light incident from the light incident part, and the display surface part is a display surface part (for example, a flat surface) of the second light guide plate 911B3) so as to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion and substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate. Placed one on top of the other Furthermore, a rib having an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the light incident portion toward the emitting portion between the display surface portion of the second light guide plate and the display surface portion of the third light guide plate ( For example, ribs 9113B, 9115B, 9117B, 9119B) are formed.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, also for the third light guide plate, the display surface portion (for example, the flat surface 911C3) of the third light guide plate is the display surface portion (for example, the flat surface 911B3) of the second light guide plate. ), And is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate. Has been placed. For this reason, light incident from the light source that should be incident on the other light guide plate can be suppressed on the light incident portion side, and the distance from the emission portion of the other light guide plate is reduced on the emission portion side. Therefore, a thicker light can be emitted together with the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate, and the appeal power to a third party can be further increased. In addition, it is possible to view more images appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (displacement) while reducing the installation space, and it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

  Note that “the image appears by taking in the predetermined light” described in the above (1) and (2) means that the image is taken in the normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to not appearing. For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 10-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[No. 10-2 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted, and a first light guide plate (for example, a first light guide plate) on which the predetermined light is introduced. 1 light guide plate 911A) and a second light guide plate (for example, second light guide plate 911B), and the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate receive the predetermined light. A light incident portion (for example, a proximal side surface 911A1 and a proximal side surface 911B1), and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911A3 and a flat surface 911B3) on which the image appears due to light incident from the light incident portion. And an exit portion for emitting light incident from the light entrance portion (for example, the side surface 911A2 on the opposite base side and the side surface 911B2 on the opposite base side), and the display surface portions thereof are facing each other. These display surfaces are The first light is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the portion, and is disposed so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light that is taken in. Between the display surface portion of the light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate, a first protrusion having a predetermined length and relatively provided on the light incident side, and the first projection A second protrusion provided shorter than the protrusion and provided on the emission side is provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate are in the traveling direction of predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion while the display surface portions face each other. Are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken in. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize images appearing on the respective light guide plates with parallax (displacement) while reducing the installation space, and an effect with a high visual effect can be performed. Here, “substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken in” means that the display surface portion of the first light guide plate is in the direction of the predetermined light introduced into the first light guide plate. This means that the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the second light guide plate.

  In addition, a first projection having a predetermined length and a second projection shorter than the first projection are provided between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate. It is provided on the injection side. Therefore, the interval between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is larger on the light incident side than on the emission side. Thereby, in the light-incidence part side, the incident light of the light from the light source which should mutually enter into another light-guide plate can be suppressed. On the other hand, on the emission part side, the distance between the emission part of the first light guide plate and the emission part of the second light guide plate is closer than the light incident part side, so that thick light can be emitted, and a third party can be emitted. It becomes possible to increase the appeal power against.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1), further including a third light guide plate on which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light, wherein the predetermined light is incident on the third light guide plate. A light incident part, a display surface part on which the image appears by light incident from the light incident part, and an emission part that emits light incident from the light incident part. 2 is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion while facing the second display surface portion, and is approximately with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the third light guide plate. Further, they are arranged so as to be parallel to each other, and have a predetermined length between the display surface portion of the second light guide plate and the display surface portion of the third light guide plate. Than the third protrusion provided on the writing light side and the third protrusion. Ku and wherein the fourth projection and provided on the exit side.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, also for the third light guide plate, the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion while the display surface portion of the third light guide plate faces the second display surface portion Are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the third light guide plate. For this reason, light incident from the light source that should be incident on the other light guide plate can be suppressed on the light incident portion side, and the distance from the emission portion of the other light guide plate is reduced on the emission portion side. Therefore, a thicker light can be emitted together with the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate, and the appeal power to a third party can be further increased. In addition, it is possible to view more images appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (displacement) while reducing the installation space, and it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

  Note that “the image appears by taking in the predetermined light” described in the above (1) and (2) means that the image is taken in the normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to not appearing. For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a tenth and third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[10-3 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted, and a first light guide plate (for example, a first light guide plate) on which the predetermined light is introduced. 1 light guide plate 911A) and a second light guide plate (for example, second light guide plate 911B), and the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate receive the predetermined light. A light incident portion (for example, a proximal side surface 911A1 and a proximal side surface 911B1), and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911A3 and a flat surface 911B3) on which the image appears due to light incident from the light incident portion. And an exit portion for emitting light incident from the light entrance portion (for example, the side surface 911A2 on the opposite base side and the side surface 911B2 on the opposite base side), and the display surface portions thereof are facing each other. These display surfaces are Inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the part, and is arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate are in the traveling direction of predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion while the display surface portions face each other. Are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize images appearing on the respective light guide plates with parallax (displacement) while reducing the installation space, and an effect with a high visual effect can be performed.

  Note that “the image appears by taking in the predetermined light” described in the above (1) and (2) means that the image is taken in the normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to not appearing. For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides an 11th-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[11-11 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a light emitting surface portion (for example, LED board 922) in which at least a first light source and a second light source are arranged, and the first light source and / or the second light source. And a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911C) having a light incident portion (for example, a side surface 911C1 of the base end portion) that takes in at least light, and an image appears by taking light from the light incident portion. The light incident section includes a first protrusion (for example, a protruding body 956) that receives light from the first light source, and a first protrusion that receives light from the second light source. At least two protrusions (for example, another protrusion 956 adjacent to the protrusion 956), and the gaming machine includes at least the first protrusion and the second protrusion. A partition member (for example, a partition wall 937) for partitioning is provided. To.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, between the first protrusion (for example, the protrusion 956) and the second protrusion (for example, another protrusion 956 adjacent to the protrusion 956). Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from the light sources from entering each other, that is, other light sources from being mixedly incident, so that an effect with a high visual effect can be performed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1), the light guide plate has a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911C3) on which the image is displayed by light incident from the light incident portion, the first light source or / And is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the second light source and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate. The two protrusions are formed so as to face the first light source and the second light source, respectively.

  When the display surface portion (for example, the flat surface 911C3) of the light guide plate is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the light source as in the gaming machine of (2) above, the traveling direction and the guiding direction of the light from the light source There is a possibility that a predetermined angle is generated between the light plate and the end portion of the light plate, and the light from the light source cannot sufficiently enter the light guide plate. Therefore, the first protrusion is formed so as to face the first light source, and the second protrusion is formed so as to face the second light source. Thereby, the light emitted from the first light source is efficiently incident on the first protrusion, and the light emitted from the second light source is efficiently incident on the second protrusion. As a result, it is possible to enhance the video visual effect.

  As described in (1) above, “an image appears by taking light from a light incident part” and “an image appears by light incident from a light incident part” described in (2) above. It is not limited to the fact that the image does not appear at normal times (when light is not taken in from the light incident portion). For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by introducing disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when light is input from a light incident portion is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, an image displayed indirectly or directly by light from a light source is also “ This is called “image”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. Furthermore, the traveling direction of the light from the light source arranged on the substrate is not limited to the case where the light source is substantially orthogonal to the substrate, and when the light source is a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb) The traveling direction of light from the light source may be inclined with respect to the substrate, as in the case where the device itself is inclined with respect to the substrate.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides an 11-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[11-2 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted, and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) on which an image appears by incorporating the predetermined light. The light guide plate transmits a light incident part (for example, side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side) where the predetermined light enters and light incident from the light incident part. Display surface portions (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3) on which the image appears, and the display surface portions are at least partially impervious to inhibit transmission of light incident from the light incident portions. It has a sex region.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when predetermined light enters from the light incident part of the light guide plate, a non-transparent area is created three-dimensionally and conspicuously raised by the surrounding light transmissive area. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect with a high visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1), the light guide plate is incorporated in the light guide plate while the display surface portion is inclined with respect to a traveling direction of predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. The light incident part is formed so as to face the light emitting surface part and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the display surface portion of the light guide plate is arranged to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, the light emitting surface portion and the light incident portion of the light guide plate There is a possibility that a predetermined angle is generated between the light emitting surface portion and the light emitted from the light emitting surface portion cannot sufficiently enter the light guide plate. Therefore, the light incident portion of the light guide plate is formed so as to face the light emitting surface portion, so that light from the light emitting surface portion can efficiently enter the light guide plate. As a result, it is possible to enhance the video visual effect.

  Note that “the image appears by taking in the predetermined light” described in (1) above means that the image is not shown in the normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to that. For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  Further, the “light emitting surface portion” described in the above (1) and (2) includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 12th-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[12-1 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a light emitting surface portion (for example, an LED substrate 922) on which a plurality of light sources are arranged, and a plurality of light emitting portions (for example, a lens 928A, 928B, 928C), and a light guide plate (for example, light guide plate 911) on which an image appears by taking in light from a light source different from the light emitting member. The plurality of light emitting units are arranged behind the light guide plate so as to have different lengths from the light source, and the light emitting member conducts light taken from the light source to the light emitting unit. As for each of the plurality of light emitting units, a conductive unit having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the corresponding light emitting unit (for example, the light guide lens 924). , And having 924B, the 924C).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the plurality of light emitting units are arranged side by side with different lengths from the light source to the light emitting unit behind the light guide plate. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect with a high visual effect.

  By the way, since each of the plurality of light emitting units takes light from the light sources arranged on the same light emitting surface portion, if the length from the light source to the light emitting unit is different, the light emission intensity in the light emitting unit varies. There is a risk that it will occur. Therefore, the light-emitting member has a conductive portion having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the light-emitting portion, corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting portions, so that the light taken from the light source is conducted to the light-emitting portion. ing. As a result, for a plurality of light emitting units with different lengths from the light source to the light emitting unit, the light emission intensity in the light emitting unit is made substantially uniform even though all take in light from the light source arranged on the same light emitting surface part. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

  Note that “an image appears by taking light from a light source” is not limited to the fact that an image does not appear at normal times (when no light is taken from a light source). For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by ambient light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when light is taken in from a light source is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, an image displayed indirectly or directly by light from a light source is also “ This is called “image”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. Furthermore, the traveling direction of the light from the light source arranged on the substrate is not limited to the case where the light source is substantially orthogonal to the substrate, and when the light source is a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb) The traveling direction of light from the light source may be inclined with respect to the substrate, as in the case where the device itself is inclined with respect to the substrate.

  In the above (1), the expression for the distance and the dimension is unified with “length”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the dimension of the structure itself (for example, the light emitting unit itself) is defined as “length”. The length between objects may be defined as “distance”.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a twelfth game machine having the following configuration.

[12th game machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) on which a plurality of light sources are arranged, and a plurality of light emitting portions (for example, a lens 928A) that emits light by taking in light from the light sources. , 928B, 928C), and a light guide plate (for example, light guide plate 911) on which an image appears by taking in light from a light source different from the light emitting member. The plurality of light emitting units are arranged behind the light guide plate so as to have different lengths from the light source, and the light emitting member conducts light taken from the light source to the light emitting unit. As a thing, the conduction | electrical_connection part (for example, light guide lens 9) of the length according to the length from the said light source to the said corresponding light emission part corresponding to each of these light emission parts. 4A, 924B, 924C), and the conductive portion is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of light from the light source and is formed to face the light source. .

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the plurality of light emitting units are arranged side by side with different lengths from the light source to the light emitting unit behind the light guide plate. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect with a high visual effect.

  By the way, since each of the plurality of light emitting units takes light from the light sources arranged on the same light emitting surface portion, if the length from the light source to the light emitting unit is different, the light emission intensity in the light emitting unit varies. There is a risk that it will occur. Therefore, the light-emitting member has a conductive portion having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the light-emitting portion, corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting portions, so that the light taken from the light source is conducted to the light-emitting portion. ing. In addition, since the conducting portion is disposed to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the light source, a predetermined angle is generated between the traveling direction of the light from the light source and the conducting portion, and the light from the light source is There is a possibility that light cannot enter the conducting part sufficiently. Therefore, the conduction portion is formed so as to face the light source disposed on the light emitting surface portion, so that light from the light source can efficiently enter the conduction portion. As a result, for a plurality of light emitting units having different lengths from the light source to the light emitting unit, all of the light emitting units take in light from the light sources arranged on the same light emitting surface unit, while efficiently incorporating light in the light emitting unit. It is possible to make the light emission intensity substantially uniform, and it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

  Note that “an image appears when light is taken from a light source different from the light emitting member” means that no image appears during normal times (when light is not taken from a light source different from the light emitting member). It is not limited. For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by introducing disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when light is taken from a light source different from the light emitting member is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, an image displayed indirectly or directly by light from a light source is also “ This is called “image”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. Furthermore, the traveling direction of the light from the light source arranged on the substrate is not limited to the case where the light source is substantially orthogonal to the substrate, and when the light source is a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb) The traveling direction of light from the light source may be inclined with respect to the substrate, as in the case where the device itself is inclined with respect to the substrate.

  According to the ninth to twelfth game machines of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a higher video visual effect.

<Additional Note (Summary of Invention Related to Control in Second Embodiment)>
[13th game machine]
Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers on the program (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and a symbol combination (display combination) related to the winning of the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. In this way, when a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed, a privilege is given to the player, so as an effect that makes the result of the internal lottery process have an expectation, the action with a dynamic feeling in the movable accessory There has been proposed a game machine that can perform the above (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-042693).

(Third issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which a movable accessory is operated, such as a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-042693, for example, the movable accessory is stopped at an appropriate position so as not to be displaced. Is required.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above third problem, and an object of the present invention is to reliably stop the projection surface onto which the image light projected from the projection unit is projected at an appropriate position.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a thirteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Thirteenth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member (for example, a column screen 710) that can be driven in a predetermined manner;
A drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) capable of driving the movable member;
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member;
Drive mode determining means for driving the movable member to determine any one of the plurality of drive data (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory sequence process);
Drive control means capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determination means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task);
A locking mechanism (for example, a gear-shaped portion 744, a stopper mechanism 790) capable of locking the movable member whose driving is stopped;
A plurality of lock release data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) for releasing the lock state of the lock mechanism and driving the drive mechanism corresponding to the plurality of drive data are stored. Locking release data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86);
When the drive mechanism is controlled based on any one of the plurality of drive data, the latch control can execute control of the latch mechanism based on the latch release data corresponding to the drive data. Means (for example, sub CPU 151 for executing a screen object control task);
With
The plurality of unlocking data are:
It is data for locking the movable member after the movable member is stopped by the control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) is driven by the driving mechanism (for example, the driving mechanism 815) and stopped, and then the locking mechanism (for example, the gear) It is locked by the shape portion 744 and the stopper mechanism 790). Therefore, the movable member can be reliably locked in a state where the movable member is stopped.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light toward a predetermined projection area (for example, a projection plane origin position);
The movable member (for example, the column screen 710)
While having a projection surface (for example, projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167), the movable member is stopped by control of the drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) Then, the projection plane is configured to stop at the predetermined projection area (for example, the projection plane origin position).

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) is stopped, the projection surface is stopped at a predetermined projection area (for example, the projection plane origin position). Thus, the movable member can be reliably locked in a state where it is stopped in the predetermined projection area, and positional deviation and the like can be prevented.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a thirteenth game machine having the following configuration.

[Thirteenth game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member (for example, a column screen 710) that can be driven in a predetermined manner;
A drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) capable of driving the movable member;
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member;
Drive mode determining means for driving the movable member to determine any one of the plurality of drive data (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory sequence process);
Drive control means capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determination means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task);
A locking mechanism (gear-shaped portion 744, stopper mechanism 790) capable of locking the movable member whose driving is stopped;
A plurality of lock release data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) for releasing the lock state of the lock mechanism and driving the drive mechanism corresponding to the plurality of drive data are stored. Locking release data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86);
With
The locking mechanism is
A groove forming member (e.g., a gear-shaped portion 744) having a groove provided to be driven together with the movable member;
An engaging member (for example, a stopper pin 7944) that can be engaged with the groove when actuated on the groove,
In the state where the movable member is stopped by the control by the drive control means, the groove portion and the engagement member are arranged to face each other.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the state where the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) is stopped by the control by the drive control means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task), the groove ( For example, the positional relationship is such that the groove 7444) and the engaging member (for example, the stopper pin 7944) face each other. Therefore, in a state where the movable member is stopped by the control by the drive control means, the groove portion and the engaging member can be reliably engaged, and as a result, the movable member can be reliably locked.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The plurality of lock release data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) are:
After the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) is stopped by the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20), the movable member is engaged. It is characterized by being data to be stopped.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) is stopped by the control of the driving mechanism (for example, the driving mechanism 815) based on the driving data (for example, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). After that, since the drive member is locked, the movable member can be locked reliably.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
A projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light toward a predetermined projection area (for example, a projection plane origin position);
The movable member (for example, the column screen 710)
While having a projection surface (for example, projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167), the movable member is stopped by control of the drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) Then, the projection plane is configured to stop at the predetermined projection area (for example, the projection plane origin position).

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) is stopped, the projection plane is stopped at a predetermined projection area (for example, the projection plane origin position). Thus, the movable member can be reliably locked in a state where it is stopped in the predetermined projection area, and positional deviation and the like can be prevented.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a thirteen-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[13-3 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member (for example, a column screen 710) that can be driven in a predetermined manner;
A drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) capable of driving the movable member;
Position detecting means (for example, optical sensors 802, 804, 806) capable of detecting the position of the movable member;
A position detection member (e.g., a light shielding piece 791) that operates in accordance with the driving of the movable member and is detected by the position detection unit;
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member;
Drive mode determining means for driving the movable member to determine any one of the plurality of drive data (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory sequence process);
Drive control means capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determination means and the detection result by the position detection means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task); ,
A locking mechanism (gear-shaped portion 744, stopper mechanism 790) capable of locking the movable member whose driving is stopped;
A plurality of lock release data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) for releasing the lock state of the lock mechanism and driving the drive mechanism corresponding to the plurality of drive data are stored. Locking release data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86);
When the drive mechanism is controlled based on any one of the plurality of drive data, the latch control can execute control of the latch mechanism based on the latch release data corresponding to the drive data. Means (for example, sub CPU 151 for executing a screen object control task);
With
The plurality of unlocking data are:
Data for locking the movable member after the movable member is stopped by the control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data;
The drive control means includes
The driving of the movable member is continued until the position detection member is detected by the position detection means, and the movable member is stopped at a predetermined position based on the detection of the position detection member. Controlling the drive mechanism;
further,
An abnormality processing means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that performs error processing) that performs processing when an abnormality occurs is detected when the position detection member is not detected by the position detection means for a predetermined time or more while the movable member is driven. It is characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the drive control means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) is detected by the position detection means (for example, the optical sensors 802, 804, 806). For example, the driving of the movable member (for example, the column body screen 710) is continued until the light shielding piece 791) is detected, and the movable member is stopped based on the detection of the position detection member. For example, the drive mechanism 815) is controlled. Therefore, no matter what position the movable member is in before driving, the movable member is stopped based on the detection of the position detection member. The position can be stopped (for example, any one of the projection planes 7123, 7141, and 7167 can be stopped at the projection plane origin position). Then, the movable member can be reliably locked by the locking mechanism (for example, the gear-shaped portion 744 and the stopper mechanism 790) while the movable member is stopped at the specified position.

  Further, the abnormality processing means is such that the position detection member (for example, the light shielding piece 791) is fixed by the position detection means (for example, the optical sensors 802, 804, 806) while the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) is being driven. When it has not been detected for more than the time, an abnormality occurrence process is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform appropriate processing according to the occurrence of the abnormality by the abnormality processing means.

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) above further includes projection means (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting video light toward a predetermined projection area (for example, the projection plane origin position).
The movable member (for example, the column screen 710)
While having a projection surface (for example, projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167), the movable member is stopped by control of the drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) Then, the projection plane is configured to stop at the predetermined projection area (for example, the projection plane origin position).

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) is stopped, the projection surface is stopped at a predetermined projection area (for example, the projection plane origin position). Thus, the movable member can be reliably locked in a state where it is stopped in the predetermined projection area, and positional deviation and the like can be prevented.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a thirteenth and fourth game machine having the following configuration.

[13th-4th Game Machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member (for example, a column screen 710) that can be driven in a predetermined manner;
A drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) capable of driving the movable member;
Position detecting means (for example, optical sensors 802, 804, 806) capable of detecting the position of the movable member;
A position detection member (e.g., a light shielding piece 791) that operates in accordance with the driving of the movable member and is detected by the position detection unit;
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member;
Drive mode determining means for driving the movable member to determine any one of the plurality of drive data (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory sequence process);
Drive control means capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determination means and the detection result by the position detection means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task); ,
A locking mechanism (gear-shaped portion 744, stopper mechanism 790) capable of locking the movable member whose driving is stopped;
A plurality of lock release data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) for releasing the lock state of the lock mechanism and driving the drive mechanism corresponding to the plurality of drive data are stored. Locking release data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86);
When the drive mechanism is controlled based on any one of the plurality of drive data, the latch control can execute control of the latch mechanism based on the latch release data corresponding to the drive data. Means (for example, sub CPU 151 for executing a screen object control task);
With
The drive control means includes
The drive mechanism is controlled so that the movable member is stopped at a specific stop position based on detection of the position detection member by a specific position detection unit based on the drive data. .

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the drive control means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) should be stopped based on the drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT01). (For example, the pattern in which the projection surface 7123 stops at the projection plane origin position) and the position detection member by the position detection unit corresponding to another stop pattern (for example, the pattern in which the projection plane 7141 stops at the projection plane origin position). Even if detected, the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) is continued so that the drive of the movable member (for example, the column body screen 710) is continued, and the position detection means corresponding to the specific stop pattern is used. Based on the detection of the detection member, the drive mechanism is set so that the movable member is stopped in a specific stop pattern. To your. Therefore, the movable member can be reliably stopped with a specific stop pattern. The movable member can be reliably locked by the locking mechanism (for example, the gear-shaped portion 744 and the stopper mechanism 790) while the movable member is stopped in a specific stop pattern.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The plurality of lock release data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) are:
After the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) is stopped by the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20), the movable member is engaged. It is characterized by being data to be stopped.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in a state where the movable member is stopped in a specific stop pattern (for example, a pattern in which the projection plane 7123 stops at the projection plane origin position), a locking mechanism (for example, a gear shape) Part 744 and stopper mechanism 790).

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
A projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light toward a predetermined projection area (for example, a projection plane origin position);
The movable member (for example, the column screen 710)
The movable member has a plurality of projection surfaces (for example, projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167) and is controlled by the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). Is stopped, any one of the plurality of projection surfaces is configured to be stopped in the predetermined projection area,
The plurality of lock release data (for example, solenoid sequence tables ST01 to ST20) are:
Even if the projection plane stopped in the predetermined projection area is any of the plurality of projection planes, data for locking the movable member after the projection plane is stopped in the predetermined projection area It is characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) has a plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the projection surface 7123, the projection surface 7141, and the projection surface 7167), the predetermined projection area Regardless of which projection plane is stopped (for example, the projection plane origin position), the locking mechanism (for example, the gear-shaped portion 744) is in a state where the projection plane is stopped in a predetermined projection area. , The movable member can be reliably locked by the stopper mechanism 790), and positional deviation and the like can be prevented.

  According to the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movable accessory can be stopped at an appropriate position.

[14th game machine]
Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers on the program (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and a symbol combination (display combination) related to the winning of the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player.

  In addition, there is a game machine called a pachislot machine in which a lock effect is performed, for example, as one of the effects that the player expects that the result of the internal lottery process is a special result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010). 005025 publication). In this lock effect, an invalidation period for invalidating various operations such as a start switch and a stop switch is set. After the invalidation period ends, the game state is controlled to a normal game state or a game state with higher advantage.

(Fourth issue)
By the way, in the gaming machine in which the above-mentioned lock effect is performed as one of the effects that the player expects that the result of the internal lottery process is a special result, the game state after the lock effect is ended is related to the lock effect. If it can be detected inside, there is a risk that interest will decline.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above fourth problem, and it is an object of the present invention to make it difficult to detect the gaming state after the lock effect has ended during the lock effect, and to suppress a decrease in interest. .

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[14th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of executing a game in any one of a plurality of gaming states having different advantages, and capable of proceeding with a game by a player's operation,
A variable display device (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) having a plurality of symbol rows with symbols in the circumferential direction;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of symbol rows;
Display means (for example, a projector 213, a projector substrate) capable of displaying an effect image in a predetermined display area (for example, projecting video light and projecting it onto a projection surface);
First control means (for example, main control circuit 90) capable of executing control related to execution of the game;
Second control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 150) capable of receiving information from the first control means and executing control related to effects based on the received information;
With
The first control means includes
Fluctuation control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling fluctuation of the plurality of symbol rows;
Stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing control to stop the symbol sequence corresponding to the stop operation means that has been stopped based on the stop operation means being stopped;
An operation invalidation means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of generating an invalidation period (for example, a lock effect) for invalidating the player's operation;
Information transmitting means (for example, the first serial communication circuit 114) capable of transmitting the gaming state information, the invalidation period start information and the invalidation period end information;
Have
The second control means includes
Information receiving means (for example, the sub-control circuit 150) capable of receiving the gaming state information, the invalidation period start information and the invalidation period end information;
When it is determined that the gaming state is changed at least from the gaming state information, as focus data (for example, data for setting the focus A to C) of the effect image displayed in the predetermined display area, Focus data output means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) capable of outputting focus data corresponding to the changed gaming state to the display means;
Have
The focus data output means includes
Even when it is determined that the gaming state is changed, during the invalidation period, the focus data corresponding to the changed gaming state is not output, and the invalidation period ends. The focus data corresponding to the changed gaming state is output to the display means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the focus data output means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen object control task) is in the invalidation period (for example, even if it is determined that the gaming state is changed) In the case of a lock effect), focus data corresponding to the changed gaming state is displayed based on the end of the invalidation period without outputting focus data corresponding to the changed gaming state. It outputs to a means (for example, the projector 213, a projector board | substrate). Therefore, during the invalidation period, it is possible to make it difficult to detect whether or not to shift to a gaming state having a relatively high advantage. In particular, the invalidation period often occurs when there is a high possibility of being controlled to a gaming state having a relatively high advantage. Therefore, during the invalidation period, the gaming state after the invalidation period ends is detected. If it does, there is a risk that the interest will be reduced. In this regard, according to the present invention, it is difficult to detect the gaming state after the invalidation period ends until the invalidation period ends.

  The focus data corresponding to the game state before the change may be continued until the focus data corresponding to the game state after the change is output to the display means (for example, the projector 213 or the projector board). However, focus data that is out of focus may be output to the display means.

  Further, the information transmitting means (for example, the first serial communication circuit 114) may transmit the gaming state information, the invalidation period start information, and the invalidation period end information independently, or two or more. The information may be transmitted together. For example, if the invalidation period start information and invalidation period end information are transmitted separately, the focus data output means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) After receiving the start information of the period, the focus data can be output to the display means (for example, the projector 213, the projector substrate) based on the reception of the end information of the invalidation period. Also, when both the invalidation period start information and the invalidation period end information are transmitted (simultaneously) (for example, when the invalidation period start information is transmitted, the invalidation period execution period information is transmitted together. If so, the focus data output means can output the focus data to the display means based on the fact that the execution period of the invalidation period has elapsed after receiving the invalidation period start information.

  The display means may be, for example, a liquid crystal display, a dot display, a segment display, or the like in addition to a projection means capable of projecting an image on a projection surface by projecting image light. For example, in the case of display means such as a liquid crystal display, dot display, segment display, etc., the image is blurred until the invalidation period ends, and a clear image is displayed based on the end of the invalidation period Can be assumed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A movable member that can be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, a columnar screen 710);
The display means includes
Projection means (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light toward a predetermined projection area (for example, a projection plane origin position);
The movable member is
It has a plurality of projection planes (for example, projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167) corresponding to the gaming state, and can be driven such that any one of the plurality of projection planes is stopped in the predetermined projection area. ,
The second control means (for example, the sub control circuit 150)
Drive control means for driving the movable member so that a projection plane corresponding to the gaming state among the plurality of projection planes is stopped in the predetermined projection area (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task) Further comprising
The focus data output means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen object control task)
When the projection plane corresponding to the gaming state is stopped in the predetermined projection area, focus data corresponding to the projection plane stopped in the predetermined projection area is output to the projection means.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, any one of a plurality of projection planes (for example, projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167) corresponding to the gaming state is a predetermined projection area (for example, the projection plane origin). When it is stopped at the position), focus data corresponding to the projection plane stopped in the predetermined projection area is output. That is, since focus data is output after any one of the plurality of projection planes is stopped in the predetermined projection area, the gaming state is detected before the projection plane is stopped in the predetermined projection area. Can be prevented.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
One projection plane and the other projection planes of the plurality of projection planes (for example, projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167) are:
A projection distance from the projection unit (for example, the projector 213) to the one projection plane (for example, the projection plane 7123) and a projection distance from the projection unit to the other projection plane (for example, the projection plane 7141) It is configured differently.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the projection distance from the projection unit (for example, the projector 213) to one projection plane (for example, the projection plane 7123) and the other projection plane (for example, the projection plane) from the projection unit Since the projection distance up to 7141) is different, it is possible to project a video with variations by changing the appearance. However, if the projection distance from the projection means to the one projection plane is different from the projection distance from the projection means to the other projection plane, the video is blurred and unclear, which may reduce the interest. In this regard, in the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the distance from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) is different for each projection plane, the focus of the image light is adjusted for each projection plane. The decrease can be suppressed.

  According to the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it becomes difficult to detect the gaming state after the lock effect is ended during the lock effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[15th game machine]
Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers on the program (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and a symbol combination (display combination) related to the winning of the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. In this way, when a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed, a privilege is given to the player, so as an effect that makes the result of the internal lottery process have an expectation, the action with a dynamic feeling in the movable accessory There has been proposed a game machine that can perform the above (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-042693).

(Fifth issue)
However, for example, as in Patent Document 1, a gaming machine in which a movable accessory is operated is required to be smoothly stopped at an appropriate position so as not to cause a displacement of the movable accessory.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a movable accessory can be smoothly stopped at an appropriate position.

  In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides a 15-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15th Game Machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member (for example, a column screen 710) that can be driven in a predetermined manner;
A drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) capable of driving the movable member;
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member;
Drive mode determining means for driving the movable member to determine any one of the plurality of drive data (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory sequence process);
Drive control means capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determination means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task);
Stop request generating means for generating a stop request for stopping driving of the drive mechanism based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
When the stop request is generated during execution of the control of the drive mechanism based on specific drive data (motor sequence table MT15) among the plurality of drive data, and the drive data change condition is satisfied (for example, the loop counter is No1) , No3, or No4), the data changing means (for example, changing the specific drive data to other drive data among the plurality of drive data based on the timing when the stop request is generated) A sub CPU 151) for executing a screen operation canceling process;
It is characterized by providing.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), the drive mechanism is being controlled based on specific drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT15) among a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT19). Even if a stop request for stopping the drive of the drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) is generated and the drive data change condition is satisfied (for example, if the loop counter is No1, No3, or No4). The specific drive data is changed to other data based on the timing when the stop request is generated. As a result, the movable member can be reliably stopped without causing a positional shift or the like.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
Projection means (projector) capable of projecting video light toward a predetermined projection area (for example, the projection plane origin position);
A gaming state changing means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of changing to another gaming state having a different advantage,
Further comprising
The movable member (for example, the column screen 710)
As a projection surface that can be stopped in the predetermined projection area, it has a plurality of projection surfaces,
The drive data storage means (for example, the ROM cartridge substrate 86)
The plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) including the projection plane to be stopped among the plurality of projection planes (for example, projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167) are stored, and the data changing unit ( For example, dedicated drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT20) when the drive data is changed by the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen operation canceling process is also stored.
The drive mode determination means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory sequence process)
When the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, the projection data corresponding to the changed gaming state is determined as the stored drive data to stop in the predetermined projection area,
The data changing means is
The specific drive data (motor sequence table MT15) can be changed to the dedicated drive data among the plurality of drive data based on the timing at which the stop request is generated.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the drive data storage means (for example, the ROM cartridge substrate 86) has a predetermined projection area (for example, projection) among the plurality of projection planes (for example, projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167). A plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT19) including the projection plane to be stopped at the plane origin position) is stored, and the drive data is generated by the data changing means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen operation canceling process). Dedicated drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT20) at the time of change is also stored. Further, the data changing means changes the specific drive data to dedicated drive data among the plurality of drive data based on the timing when the stop request is generated. This makes it possible to change to dedicated drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT20) only when the specific drive data cannot be used.

  In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides a 15-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15-2 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member (for example, a column screen 710) that can be driven in a predetermined manner;
A drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) capable of driving the movable member;
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member;
Drive mode determining means for driving the movable member to determine any one of the plurality of drive data (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory sequence process);
Drive control means capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determination means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task);
Stop request generating means for generating a stop request for stopping the driving of the drive mechanism based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes effect content determination processing);
With
The drive data storage means includes
After performing the operation effect of driving the movable member in a predetermined manner, the movable member is driven to generate a plurality of stop patterns (for example, a pattern in which the projection plane 7123 stops at the projection plane origin position, the projection plane 7141 First drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT15) to be stopped in any one stop pattern among the stop pattern and the projection surface 7167 stop pattern);
Second drive data (for example, a motor sequence table) for driving the movable member to stop at a specific stop pattern (for example, a pattern in which the projection plane 7123 stops at the projection plane origin position) among the plurality of stop patterns. MT01), and
When the stop request is generated during the execution of the control of the drive mechanism based on the first drive data and before the end of the operation effect, the first drive data is changed to the second drive data. And a data changing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen operation canceling process) for controlling the driving mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above (1), the control of the drive mechanism based on the first drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT15) is being executed and the operation effect (for example, step number 1 of the motor sequence table MT15). When a stop request is generated before the end of step No. 51), the drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) is driven by changing from the first drive data to the second drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT01). Execute the control to Therefore, when a stop request is generated during the execution of the above-mentioned motion effect, the motion effect is terminated midway, and the movable member has a specific stop pattern (for example, a pattern in which the projection surface 7123 stops at the projection surface origin position). Since the column screen 710 is stopped, for example, the movable member can be stopped in a specific stop pattern while reducing the time.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) are:
Acceleration data for accelerating the movable member (for example, step number 1 to step number 6 of the motor sequence table MT01),
Steady data (for example, step number 7 of the motor sequence table MT01) for steady driving after the movable member is accelerated, and
Deceleration data (for example, step number 8 to step number 12 of the motor sequence table MT01) for decelerating after the movable member is driven steadily,
Holding data (for example, step number 13 of the motor sequence table MT01) for stopping the movable member for a certain period of time after the movable member is decelerated;
It is characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, after accelerating the movable member (for example, the column screen 710), the movable member is steadily driven, then the movable member is decelerated, and then stopped for a certain period of time. Control can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a period for steady driving of the movable member and a period for stopping the movable member, and to reliably control the movable member based on drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). It becomes possible.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
Position detecting means (for example, optical sensors 802, 804, 806) capable of detecting a plurality of positions of the movable member;
A position detection member (e.g., a light shielding piece 791) that operates in accordance with the driving of the movable member and is detected by the position detection unit;
Further comprising
The drive control means includes
Whether or not the position detection member is detected by the position detection means is determined during the control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20), and the position detection means Based on the detection of the position detection member at any position, the control of the drive mechanism can be executed so that the movable member stops at a stop pattern corresponding to the position detected by the position detection means. It is characterized by being composed.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the drive control means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) is covered by the position detection means (for example, the optical sensor 802, the optical sensor 804, and the optical sensor 806). The determination as to whether or not the position detection member (for example, the light shielding piece 791) has been detected is performed during the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). Based on the detection of the position detection member at any position by the position detection means, the drive mechanism is controlled so that the movable member stops in a stop pattern corresponding to the position detected by the position detection means. The Therefore, since the movable member is stopped based on the detection of the position detection member regardless of the position of the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) before driving, the position before the movement Regardless, the movable member can be stopped in any stop pattern (for example, any one of the projection planes 7123, 7141, and 7167 can be stopped at the projection plane origin position).

  In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides a 15-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15-3 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member (for example, a column screen 710) that can be driven in a predetermined manner;
A drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) capable of driving the movable member;
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member;
Drive mode determining means for driving the movable member to determine any one of the plurality of drive data (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory sequence process);
Position detecting means (for example, optical sensors 802, 804, 806) capable of detecting a plurality of positions of the movable member;
A position detection member (e.g., a light shielding piece 791) that operates in accordance with the driving of the movable member and is detected by the position detection unit;
The driving mechanism is driven based on the driving data determined by the driving mode determining means, and the movable member is moved within a predetermined time after the position detecting member detects any position of the position detecting means. Drive control means (for example, a screen accessory control task that can control the drive mechanism so that the movable member stops in a stop pattern corresponding to any position detected by the position detection means by stopping. Sub CPU 151) for executing
Stop request generating means for generating a stop request for stopping the driving of the drive mechanism based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes effect content determination processing);
When the stop request is generated during execution of the control of the drive mechanism based on first drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT15) among the plurality of drive data, the first drive data is sent to the stop request. A data changing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen operation canceling process) that changes the driving data to another driving data according to the timing of occurrence of the control and executes control of the driving mechanism;
With
The drive data storage means includes
After performing the operation effect of driving the movable member in a predetermined manner, the position detection member is detected at any position by the position detection means after a predetermined time has elapsed since the drive of the movable member was started. Then, first drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT15) for stopping the movable member in a stop pattern corresponding to the position detected by the position detection unit,
When the position detection member is detected at a specific position by the position detection means when a certain time has elapsed after the driving of the movable member is started, the specific stop pattern corresponding to the specific position is used. Second drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT01) for stopping the movable member;
When the position detection unit detects the position detection member at the specific position when a time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of driving the movable member, the specific stop pattern Third drive data (for example, motor sequence table MT20) for stopping the movable member;
Remember
The data changing means is
When the stop request is generated before the end of the operation effect, normal data changing means (for example, a cancel check table) that changes the first drive data to the second drive data and executes control of the drive mechanism. In the case of No1, No4, the sub CPU 151) that executes the processing of step S67 and step S69,
When the stop request is generated within a specific time after the operation effect has ended and the movable member cannot be stopped by any of the stop patterns, the first drive data is changed to the third drive data. Delay data changing means for executing control of the drive mechanism (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the processing of step S67 and step S69 in the case of the cancellation check table No3),
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a stop request is generated during execution of control of a drive mechanism (eg, drive mechanism 815) based on first drive data (eg, motor sequence table MT15), the first Data changing means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes screen operation canceling processing) is provided that changes the driving data to other driving data in accordance with the timing at which the stop request is generated and executes control of the driving mechanism. This data changing means is configured to change the first drive data to the second drive data when a stop request is generated before the end of the operation effect (for example, step 1 to step 51 of the motor sequence table MT15) to be driven in a predetermined manner. (For example, in the case of cancel check tables No1 and No4, sub-CPU 151 that executes the processing of step S67 and step S69) that changes to the motor sequence table MT01 and executes control of the drive mechanism is included. . Therefore, based on the stop request, the control of the drive mechanism based on the first drive data is terminated in the middle of the operation effect that drives the movable member in a predetermined manner, and the drive mechanism is controlled based on the second drive data. Can be changed.

  Further, the data changing means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen operation canceling process) performs the first driving when the stop request is generated within a specific time during which the movable member cannot be stopped in any stop pattern. Delay data changing means for changing the data to third drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT20) and executing control of the drive machine (for example, in the case of the cancellation check table No3, the processing of step S67 and step S69 is executed. A sub CPU 151). According to this, even if the position detection member (the light shielding piece 791) should be detected by any position detection means when the control of the drive mechanism based on the first drive data is continued, The position detection member operates to a position exceeding the detection range of the position detection means. Thereafter, the drive mechanism is controlled based on the third drive data. For this reason, even if control of the drive mechanism based on the first drive data is continued, there is a possibility that the position detection member (light shielding piece 791) may be detected by any of the position detection means. For example, it is possible to reliably stop the movable member with a stop pattern corresponding to the position detection unit that detects the position detection member while suppressing occurrence of positional deviation (stopping at a position shifted from the position to be stopped). .

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The plurality of driving data are:
Acceleration data for accelerating the movable member (for example, step number 1 to step number 6 of the motor sequence table MT01),
Steady data (for example, step number 7 of the motor sequence table MT01) for steady driving after the movable member is accelerated, and
Deceleration data (for example, step number 8 to step number 12 of the motor sequence table MT01) for decelerating after the movable member is driven steadily,
Holding data (for example, step number 13 of the motor sequence table MT01) for stopping the movable member for a certain period of time after the movable member is decelerated;
It is characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, after accelerating the movable member (for example, the column screen 710), the movable member is steadily driven, then the movable member is decelerated, and then stopped for a certain period of time. Control can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a period for steady driving of the movable member and a period for stopping the movable member, and to reliably control the movable member based on drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). It becomes possible.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
The drive control means includes
It is determined whether or not the position detection member (for example, the light shielding piece 791) is detected by the position detection unit (for example, the optical sensors 802, 804, 806), based on the drive data (for example, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). ) Based on the detection of the position detection member at any position by the position detection means, and the stop corresponding to the position detected by the position detection means. The drive mechanism can be controlled so that the movable member stops in a pattern (for example, a pattern in which the projection plane 7123 stops, a pattern in which the projection plane 7141 stops, or a pattern in which the projection plane 7167 stops) at the projection plane origin position. It is characterized by being configured.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the drive control means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) is covered by the position detection means (for example, the optical sensor 802, the optical sensor 804, and the optical sensor 806). It is determined whether or not a position detection member (for example, the light shielding piece 791) has been detected during execution of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). Based on the detection of the position detection member at any position by the detection means, the drive mechanism is controlled so that the movable member stops in a stop pattern corresponding to the position detected by the position detection means. Therefore, since the movable member is stopped based on the detection of the position detection member regardless of the position of the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) before driving, the position before the movement Regardless, the movable member can be stopped in any stop pattern (for example, any one of the projection planes 7123, 7141, and 7167 can be stopped at the projection plane origin position).

  In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides a 15th-4th gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15th-4th Game Machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable member (for example, a column screen 710) that can be driven in a predetermined manner;
A drive mechanism (for example, drive mechanism 815) capable of driving the movable member;
Drive data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) for storing a plurality of drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20) having different drive modes for driving the movable member;
Drive mode determining means for driving the movable member to determine any one of the plurality of drive data (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory sequence process);
Drive control means capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data determined by the drive mode determination means (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes a screen accessory control task);
Stop request generating means for generating a stop request for stopping the driving of the drive mechanism based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a sub CPU 151 that executes effect content determination processing);
When the stop request is generated during execution of the control of the drive mechanism based on specific drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT15) among the plurality of drive data, and a drive data change condition is satisfied (for example, a loop counter) Data change means for changing the specific drive data to other drive data among the plurality of drive data based on the timing at which the stop request is generated. (For example, in the case of the cancellation check tables No1, No3, No4, the sub CPU 151 that executes the processing of step S67 and step S69),
Even if the stop request is generated during execution of the control of the drive mechanism based on the specific drive data, if the drive data change condition is not satisfied, the specific drive data is maintained and the drive is performed. It is characterized by having data maintaining means (for example, sub CPU 151 that executes the processing of step S67 and step S69 in the case of cancel check table No2) for continuing the control of the mechanism.

  According to the above invention (1), when a stop request is generated during execution of control of the drive mechanism based on specific drive data (for example, the motor sequence table MT15), and the drive data change condition is satisfied (for example, loop) Data change means (for example, cancel check tables No1, No3) that changes the specific drive data to other data based on the timing when the stop request is generated when the counter is No1, No3, or No4) , No4, it has a sub CPU 151) that executes the processing of step S67 and step S69. However, even if a stop request is generated during execution of control of a drive mechanism (eg, drive mechanism 815) based on specific drive data (eg, motor sequence table MT15), the drive data change condition is not satisfied. The control of the drive mechanism is continued while maintaining specific drive data. Thus, even if a stop request is generated, whether to continue control based on specific drive data or to change specific drive data to other drive data depending on whether or not the drive data change condition is satisfied Therefore, the movable member can be stopped more appropriately.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The plurality of driving data are:
Acceleration data for accelerating the movable member (for example, step number 1 to step number 6 of the motor sequence table MT01),
Steady data (for example, step number 7 of the motor sequence table MT01) for steady driving after the movable member is accelerated, and
Deceleration data (for example, step number 8 to step number 12 of the motor sequence table MT01) for decelerating after the movable member is driven steadily,
Holding data (for example, step number 13 of the motor sequence table MT01) for stopping the movable member for a certain period of time after the movable member is decelerated;
It is characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, after accelerating the movable member (for example, the column screen 710), the movable member is steadily driven, then the movable member is decelerated, and then stopped for a certain period of time. Control can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a period for steady driving of the movable member and a period for stopping the movable member, and to reliably control the movable member based on drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). It becomes possible.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
Position detecting means (for example, optical sensors 802, 804, 806) capable of detecting a plurality of positions of the movable member;
A position detection member (e.g., a light shielding piece 791) that operates in accordance with the driving of the movable member and is detected by the position detection unit;
Further comprising
The drive control means includes
Whether or not the position detection member is detected by the position detection means is determined during the control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data (for example, motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20), and the position detection means Based on the detection of the position detection member at any position, the control of the drive mechanism can be executed so that the movable member stops at a stop pattern corresponding to the position detected by the position detection means. It is characterized by being composed.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the drive control means (for example, the sub CPU 151 that executes the screen accessory control task) is covered by the position detection means (for example, the optical sensor 802, the optical sensor 804, and the optical sensor 806). The determination as to whether or not the position detection member (for example, the light shielding piece 791) has been detected is performed during the control of the drive mechanism (for example, the drive mechanism 815) based on the drive data (for example, the motor sequence tables MT01 to MT20). Based on the detection of the position detection member at any position by the position detection means, the drive mechanism is controlled so that the movable member stops in a stop pattern corresponding to the position detected by the position detection means. The Therefore, since the movable member is stopped based on the detection of the position detection member regardless of the position of the movable member (for example, the column screen 710) before driving, the position before the movement Regardless, the movable member can be stopped in any stop pattern (for example, any one of the projection planes 7123, 7141, and 7167 can be stopped at the projection plane origin position).

  According to the fifteenth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movable accessory can be smoothly stopped at an appropriate position.

71 Main Control Board 72 Sub Control Board 213 Projector 700 Movable Screen Unit 708 Fixed Base 712 First Screen Member 714 Second Screen Member 716 Third Screen Member 722 Rotating Shaft 732 Right Base 742 Large Diameter Gear 744 Gear Shape 790 Stopper mechanism 791 Light shielding piece 815 Drive mechanism 911 Light guide plate 912R Right lens subunit 914L, 914R Inner wall 922 LED substrate 924A, 924B, 924C Light guide lens 928A, 928B, 928C Lens 937 Partition wall 956 Projection body 7082 Lower screen 7122 Definition ribs 7123, 7141, 7167 Projection surface 7144 Arm member 7145 Male rib 7164 Female rib 7326 Weight member

Claims (3)

A movable member that can be driven in a predetermined manner;
A drive mechanism capable of driving the movable member;
Drive data storage means for storing a plurality of drive data having different drive modes for driving the movable member;
Drive mode determining means for driving the movable member to determine any one of the plurality of drive data;
Drive control means capable of executing control of the drive mechanism based on drive data determined by the drive mode determination means;
A locking mechanism capable of locking the movable member whose driving is stopped;
A lock release data storage means for storing a plurality of lock release data for releasing the lock state of the lock mechanism and driving the drive mechanism corresponding to the plurality of drive data;
With
The locking mechanism is
A groove forming member having a groove provided to be driven together with the movable member;
An engaging member engageable with the groove when actuated on the groove;
The gaming machine is configured so that the groove portion and the engaging member are in a positional relationship facing each other in a state where the movable member is stopped by the control by the drive control means. The plurality of unlocking data are:
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is data for locking the movable member after the movable member is stopped by the control of the drive mechanism based on the drive data. A projection unit capable of projecting image light toward a predetermined projection area;
The movable member is
A projection surface is provided, and when the movable member is stopped by the control of the driving mechanism based on the driving data, the projection surface is stopped in the predetermined projection area. Item 3. A gaming machine according to item 1 or 2.